Versalink b600 b610 Printer b605mfp b615mfp Service
Versalink b600 b610 Printer b605mfp b615mfp Service
Service Documentation
705P01394
08/2017
NOTICE: All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for informational
purposes only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by certified, product trained
service personnel only. Xerox does not warrant or represent that such documentation is com-
plete, nor does Xerox represent or warrant that it will notify or provide to such customer any
future changes to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or modules,
components or parts of such equipment may affect the warranty offered by Xerox with respect
to such equipment. You should consult the applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer
or third party provided service. If the customer services such equipment, modules, compo-
nents or parts thereof, the customer releases Xerox from any and all liability for the customer
actions, and the customer agrees to indemnify, defend and hold Xerox harmless from any third
party claims which arise directly or indirectly from such service.
Copyright © 2017 by Xerox Corporation. All rights reserved. Xerox® and all product names and
number names are trademarks of the XEROX CORPORATION. Printed in the USA.
All service documentation is supplied to Xerox external customers for informational purposes
only. Xerox service documentation is intended for use by certified, product-trained service per-
sonnel only. Xerox does not warrant or represent that it will notify or provide to such customer
any future change to this documentation. Customer performed service of equipment, or mod-
ules, components, or parts of such equipment may affect whether Xerox is responsible to fix
machine defects under the warranty offered by Xerox with respect to such equipment. You
should consult the applicable warranty for its terms regarding customer or third-party provided
service.
Xerox
This section contains the Image Quality Repair Analysis Procedures (IQ RAPs), checkouts and Warnings, Cautions and Notes
setup procedures necessary to diagnose, isolate and repair image quality faults.
WARNING
Section 4 Repairs/Adjustments A warning is used whenever an operating or maintenance procedure, practice, condi-
This section contains the instructions for removal, replacement, and adjustment of parts. tion or statement, if not strictly observed, could result in personal injury.
A translated version of all warnings is in Translation of Warnings.
Section 5 Parts List
CAUTION
This section contains the illustrated spare parts list. Any part that is spared or that must be
removed to access a spared part is illustrated. A caution is used whenever an operation or maintenance procedure, practice, condition or
statement, if not strictly observed, could result in damage to the equipment.
Section 6 General Procedures / Information NOTE: A note appears to highlight a procedure, practice, condition or statement.
This section contains all other procedures, product specifications and general information.
Service Acronyms
Section 7 Wiring Data While using this service documentation, you may encounter acronyms that are unfamiliar.
This section contains the wiring diagrams.
To find definitions for Xerox acronyms, go to the following page in your web browser, then enter
Section 8 Principles of Operation the acronym and click Search:
This section contains details of printer operation and component locations.
https://open.xerox.com/Services/acronym
Component Names
Names of parts that appear in the disassembly procedures may not be exactly the same as the
names that appear on the part or listed in the Parts List. For example; a part called the Regis-
tration Chute Assembly may appear on the Parts List as Assembly, Chute REGI.
Maintenance Safety
• Do not attempt maintenance not specifically described in the printer documentation.
• Do not use aerosol cleaners. The use of supplies that are not approved may cause poor
performance and could create a hazardous condition.
• Caution: An unapparent hazard exists that may cause personal injury or damage to the
equipment. For example, a panel may cover the hazardous area.
• Warning: An unapparent hazard exists that may cause serious personal injury.
• Danger: An unapparent hazard exists that may cause serious personal injury or death.
Safety Interlocks
Use caution so that the safety devices for preventing accidents (interlocks switches, fuses,
thermostats, etc.) and the protective parts for users (covers, control panel, etc.) can function as
intended. Make sure all covers are in place and all interlock switches are functioning correctly
after you have completed a service call. If you bypass an interlock switch, use extreme caution
when working on or around the printer. Figure 1 and Figure 2 show the interlock switch loca-
tions and circuitry.
High-Temperature Units
When servicing high-temperature units (securing unit, etc.), be sure to turn them off to prevent
burns, injuries and other troubles. Remove the power plug and wait 30 minutes before starting
service processes so they have cooled down sufficiently.
Battery
A lithium battery is used on the ESS PWB.
WARNING
To avoid the possibility of fire or explosion, always replace the battery with the same
type, and dispose of old batteries as required by local regulations.
Figure 6 is the symbol to use caution (or draws attention to a particular component). Refer to
Figure 1 High voltage symbol
the manual(s) for information.
Figure 2 is the Protective Ground (Earth) symbol.
Figure 2 Protective ground (earth) symbol Figure 7 is the symbol indicating that the item is sensitive and should not be touched.
Figure 3 is the symbol indicating a hot surface. Use caution to avoid personal injury.
Figure 8 is the symbol indicating the item is sensitive to sunlight, and exposure to it will reduce
Figure 3 Hot surface symbol its life span.
Figure 4 is the symbol indicating that the surface is hot while the printer is running. After turning
off the power, wait 30 minutes.
Figure 9 is the symbol indicating the item is sensitive to any light, and exposure to it will reduce
its life span.
In this example, the red meter lead would be placed on P/J7 and the black lead on P/J68. – Phone* Xerox EH&S at: +44 (0) 1707 353434.
– Electronic mail Xerox EH&S at: [email protected].
If a second test point is not given, it is assumed that the black meter lead may be attached to – FAX Xerox EH&S at: +44 (0) 1707 353914 (intelnet 8*668 3914).
chassis ground. *Initial notification made by phone must be followed within 24 hours by a completed inci-
dent report and sent to the indicated electronic mail address or FAX number.
NOTE: If sending a FAX, please also send the original via internal mail.
Canada (Regulations)
This Class A digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.
European Union
CE Mark
This product, if used properly in accordance with the user's instructions, is neither dangerous
for the consumer nor for the environment.
WARNING
Perform the steps in the following procedure carefully. Failure to follow this procedure
carefully could result in electrical shock and personal injury.
DANGER: Faire très attention en effectuant les étapes de la procédure suivante. Si cette
procédure n'est pas strictement respectée, il y a des risques d'électrocution et d'autres
blessures.
AVVERTENZA: Si prega eseguire attentamente la seguente procedura. Omettere di
eseguire attentamente la procedura indicata può provocare forti scosse e gravi ferite.
VORSICHT: Befolgen Sie die Schritte der folgenden Anleitung genau. Die Nichtbefol-
gung dieser Anweisungen kann elektrischen Schlag oder andere Körperverletzungen
zur Folge haben.
AVISO: Lleve a cabo los pasos del procedimiento siguiente con mucho cuidado. No
seguir este procedimiento cuidadosamente puede ocasionar una descarga eléctrica y
lesiones personales
WARNING
Do not handle the Fuser components until they have cooled. Some Fuser components
operate at hot temperatures and can produce serious personal injury if touched.
DANGER: Ne pas manipuler les éléments du four avant de les laisser refroidir. Certains
éléments du four fonctionnent à des températures très élevées et peuvent causer de
graves blessures s'ils sont touchés.
AVVERTENZA: Non maneggiare i componenti del fusore finché non sono raffreddati.
Alcuni di questi componenti funzionano ad alte temperature e possono provocare gravi
ferite se vengono toccati.
VORSICHT: Die Fixieranlage sollte erst gehandhabt werden, wenn diese genügend
abgekühlt ist. Einige Teile der Fixieranlage erzeugen übermäßige Hitze und führen bei
der Berührung zu schweren Verbrennungen.
AVISO: No manipule los componentes del fusor antes de que se enfríen. Algunos de los
componentes del fusor funcionan a altas temperaturas y pueden ocasionar daños per-
sonales graves si se los toca.
For updates to the service manual, service bulletins, knowledge base, etc., go to:
• Xerox Global Service Net: https://www.xrxgsn.com/secure/main.
For further technical support, contact your assigned Xerox Technical Support representative.
Procedure
WARNING
solate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
WARNING
Do not work in a confined space. 1 m (39 inches) space is needed for safe working.
1. Read (if possible) fault history from the Machine Status menu on the control panel. The
error history is listed on screen.
2. Accessing fault history in Service Diagnostics
Procedure Procedure
1. Check the machine configuration with the customer, refer to GP 7 Machine Specifications.
NOTE: If a fault message appears at any time. Refer directly to the RAP for the fault message
Check that all required hardware and software is installed and/or enabled. and perform the procedure.
2. Check that all the relevant machine settings are correctly entered, refer to GP 4 System
Administration Tools. If possible, perform the following:
3. If a fault is present, go to SCP 3 Normal Call Actions. If there is no fault present, go to 1. Review any defective print samples.
SCP 6 Final Actions. 2. Determine that the user accessible settings are correct. If necessary refer to the user doc-
umentation.
4. Enter the printer and customer details in the service log.
3. Check all job queues and verify with the customer any requirement to print the documents
in memory, before switching off the power or clearing memory.
4. Print the customer assistance report (call for assistance), then record the total print count.
5. Go to SCP 4 Fault Analysis.
If a fault code is displayed, perform the Status Indicator RAP for that code. • GP 32 FAX Specifications
• GP 35 Setting Up an Ethernet Connection
Control Panel Faults • GP 36 How to Manually Configure an IP Address
If the power is on but the control panel is blank, perform dC305 Panel Diagnostics. • GP 37 How to Obtain Log Files
• GP 38 Electrical Specifications
Image Quality Defects • GP 39 Reset Administrator Password
If the image quality is defective, go to IQ1 Image Quality Entry RAP. • GP 40 Xerox Supplies and Accessories
• GP 41 Hardware Information
Unresolved Faults
If a fault cannot be resolved using the appropriate RAP, and also only if instructed by 2nd level
support, obtain a log files. Refer to GP 37 How to obtain Log Files. Escalate the problem to 2nd
level support.
Additional Information
If necessary, refer to the following general procedures and information:
• GP 1 Using the Service Diagnostics
• GP 2 Fault Codes and History Logs
• GP 3 Device Information
• GP 4 How to Switch Off or Switch On the Printer
• GP 6 Electrostatic Discharge Prevention
• GP 7 Machine Specifications
• GP 8 General Disassembly Precautions
• GP 9 Firmware Version Upgrade
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor
• GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch
• GP 13 How to Check a Switch
• GP 14 How to Clone Device Settings
• GP 15 Special Boot Modes
• GP 16 Separate System Modules
• GP 17 External FAX Line Test
• GP 18 Printing Reports
• GP 19 Intermittent or Noise Problem
• GP 20 How to Safely Lift or Move the Printer
The design life of the major components are shown in Table 1. Environmental conditions and
actual use will vary these factors. The component life shown in Table 1 is for reference only.
Like the toner cartridge, the drum cartridge has a CRUM to maintain a page count. When the
count reaches a set value, warning and error messages appear to notify the user that the drum
cartridge has reached near or end of life status.
Hardware Information
Information about spared hardware for repairs and maintenance is detailed in GP 41. This
hardware includes miscellaneous screws and e-clips that can be used to replace hardware that
is lost or damaged.
Procedure
Complete the following, if a fault is identified, return to SCP 4 Fault Analysis:
1. Perform the end of call subsystem maintenance actions, SCP 5 Subsystem Maintenance.
2. Exercise the machine in all modes, printing from all trays. If a fault message is displayed
or some other problem is evident, go to SCP 4 Fault Analysis.
3. Make a print of a customer document.
4. If any of the customers selections were changed, return them to the customers preferred
settings. Refer to GP 4 System Administration Tools.
5. At the first service and at any subsequent service where changes are made or options are
added, print the configuration report and store it with machine log book. Discard any pre-
vious versions of the configuration report.
6. Remove and destroy any copies of test patterns.
7. Ensure the machine and service area are clean before leaving the customer premises.
8. Provide customer training if required.
OF - Other Faults
OF 1 Unusual Noises RAP.............................................................................................. 2-445
OF 2 UI has no Display ................................................................................................... 2-445
OF 3 Special Boot Modes RAP....................................................................................... 2-446
OF 4 POST Error RAP .................................................................................................... 2-446
13. In the RAP, “Replacement” means the replacement of the parts that are considered to be h) Output fonts will not print correctly using the PCL driver in its default mode. To correct
this problem, use PS driver when using the PCL driver.
the cause of the trouble. Replacement of those parts means the replacement of the
assembly part (HIGH Assy) that contain them. 2. If print media misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the actions below.
14. Some of the instructions in the RAP are branched off depending on the specifications. a) Make sure the print media you are using meets the specifications for your printer.
Follow the applicable instruction. b) Flex print media before loading it in any of the sources.
Items To Be Confirmed Before Going To RAP Troubleshooting c) Make sure the print media is loaded correctly.
Basic Printer Problems d) Make sure the width and length guides on the print media sources are adjusted cor-
rectly.
Some printer problems can be easy to resolve. If a problem occurs with your printer, check
each the following: e) If the print media are overfilled in sources, reduce the amount of media.
f) Load the recommended print side correctly for the type of print media you are using.
1. If a message is displayed on the UI of operator panel, see “2.2 Error Code List”. g) Turn the print media over or around and try printing again to see if feeding improves.
2. The printer power cable is plugged into the printer and a properly grounded electrical out- h) Check the print media type loaded in the source, and refill only one type of print media,
let. if print media types are mixed.
3. The printer power is powered ON. i) Refill a new ream of print media, if some reams are mixed.
4. The electrical outlet is not turned off by any switch or breaker. j) Remove the top and bottom sheets of a ream before loading the print media.
5. Other electrical equipment plugged into the outlet is working. k) Do not reload print media until the print media source is empty.
6. All options are properly installed. 3. If envelope misfeeds or multiple feeds occur, check and try the action below.
7. If you have checked all of the above and still have a problem, turn off the printer, wait for a) Remove the stack of envelopes from the bypass tray.
10 seconds, and then turn on the printer again. This often solves the problem.
4. If page breaks in unexpected places, check and try the action below.
Display Problems
a) Check the “Job Time-out” in the Basic Settings menu and increase the value.
1. If the operator panel displays only diamonds or is blank, check and try the action below.
5. When a job is executed with a wrong paper tray or a wrong print media, check and try the
a) Turn off the printer, wait for 10 seconds, and turn on the printer. action below.
b) Self Test Message appears on the operator panel. When the test is completed, “Ready a) Check the “Paper Size” and “Paper Type” in the Tray Settings menu on the printer oper-
to Print” is displayed. ator panel and in the printer driver.
NOTE: Wait at least 3 seconds after turning the power off before turning the power on again.
Turning the power on again soon after turning the power off will not turn the power off.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING Upgrade the software, GP 9.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB and the UI assembly.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. Perform GP 15 Special Boot Modes, Function 03. NVRAM INIT MODE.
CAUTION
Do not install the ESS PWB and the MCU PWB at the same time. Always install the ESS PWB,
then verify the fault is cleared before installing the MCU PWB.
5. If the fault persists, install the new components as necessary:
• UI assembly: PL 1.1 Item 1 (MFP) or PL 1.2 Item 1 (SFP).
• ESS PWB: PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP_Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
• MCU PWB: PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP_Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
NOTE: If the fault persists after startup, perform dC132 to verify all numbers match.
Go to Serial Number Re-Synchronization in GSN (Library 1503).
NOTE: If the fault persists after startup, perform dC132 to verify all numbers match. Go to 003-329 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
Serial Number Re-Synchronization in GSN (Library 1503).
of a transmission failure is received.
003-330 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-331 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-332 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-333 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-334 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-335 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
003-336 IISS receiving error detected by the controller. The NAK that notifies of the occurrence
of a transmission failure is received.
NOTE: If the fault persists after startup, perform dC132 to verify all numbers match. Go to
Serial Number Re-Synchronization in GSN (Library 1503).
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer not to attempt to copy documents that are restricted. 1. Advise the customer to correct the magnification settings.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9. 2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
003-704 Color correction color difference error during 2 sided simultaneous scan. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job, then retry the job.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
1. Advise the customer to load the 2 sided simultaneous scan correction chart correctly.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
003-932 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 600dpi is not available. 003-930 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 300dpi, 400dpi and 600dpi are not avail-
able.
003-935 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 600dpi is not available (when the next
document exists). 003-933 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 300dpi, 400dpi and 600dpi are not avail-
able (when the next document exists).
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Procedure
1. Advise the customer to perform scanning below 400 dpi resolution. Perform the steps that follow:
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9. 1. Advise the customer to perform scanning below 200 dpi resolution or perform scanning in
other than mixed mode.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
003-931 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 400dpi and 600dpi are not available. 003-761 Tray selection error.
003-934 For scanning in the DADF mix duplex mode, 400dpi and 600dpi are not available Procedure
(when the next document exists). Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to correct the job properties.
Procedure
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to perform scanning below 300 dpi resolution or perform scanning in
other than mixed mode.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to correct the job properties. 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to change the scan resolution parameter and
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9. then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to change the job properties. 1. Advise the customer to cancel the job, then to change the scan resolution or document
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9. size parameters and retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to cancel the job then to clear the B/W setting for color mode or the 1. Advise the customer to change the job parameters, then retry the job.
side 2 cover image setting, then retry the job. 2. Ensure the HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 27 (MFP_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9. 27 (SFP), is installed correctly.
3. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ask the customer to load a correct size document, then retry the job. 1. Advise the customer to reload the correct size paper, then retry the job.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9. 2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Open the DADF upper feeder cover, PL 50.1 Item 8. Remove any jammed paper. Switch the machine off, then on, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
Reload the document. Follow the instructions on the UI to reload the documents.
010-105 After registration clutch on, exit sensor is not turned on by paper within specified time.
010-106 After registration clutch off, exit sensor is not turned off by paper within specified time.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Open the rear door, PL 19.2 and clear obstructions in the paper path.
2. Check the rear cover for damage. If the rear cover is damaged, install a new rear cover
assembly kit, PL 19.2 Item 99.
3. Check the feed and separator rolls for damage or excessive wear. If the feed and separa-
tor rolls are damaged or show excessive wear, install a new feed and separator roll kit, PL
19.2 Item 98.
4. Check the exit chute assembly, for damage or excessive wear. If the exit chute is dam-
aged, install a new exit chute assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1.
5. Reseat the fusing assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
6. Enter dC330. Check the sensors that follow:
• Code 071-103, registration sensor, PL 15.2 Item 13.
• Code 071-104, exit sensor, PL 17.1 Item 11.
7. Enter dC330. Check the clutches that follow:
• Code 071-105, exit clutch, PL 17.1 Item 4.
• Code 071-106, invert clutch, PL 17.1 Item 4.
8. Enter dC330. Check the motors that follow:
• Code 071-073, main drive assembly 2, PL 3.1 Item 2.
• Code 071-061, motor drive assembly, PL 3.1 Item 7.
9. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
BSD-ON: BSD 34: MCU, Fusing Envelope Motor 010-329 Fusing Assembly Fuse Cut Fail.
010-321 Nip CAM Sensor does not turn ON/OFF after the Nip CAM has been driven for the 010-331 Fusing Assembly HR STS Over Temperature Fail.
specified time.
010-332 Fusing Assembly HR NCS Disconnection Fail.
Procedure
010-333 Fusing Assembly HR NCS Over Temperature Fail.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do 010-334 Fusing Assembly HR NCS Broken Fail.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 010-335 Fusing Assembly HR NCS Range Fail.
WARNING
Do not touch the Fuser while it is hot. 010-338 Fusing Assembly HR On Time Fail (Wait).
012-122: Compile Tray Exit Sensor OFF Jam 012-161: Compile Tray Exit Sensor ON Jam
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 12 How to Check a Solenoid or Clutch.
Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove all paper from the finisher and cancel all jobs. Clear any jams and verify the cor-
1. Remove all paper from the finisher and cancel all jobs. Clear any jams and verify the cor-
rect paper is being used and per specifications in GP 26, Media Specifications.
rect paper is being used and per specifications in GP 26, Media Specifications.
2. Enter dC330 (012-101) to activate the compile exit sensor, PL 21.2 Item 9.
2. Check the takeaway pinch roll and takeaway chute, PL 21.2 Item 4, for incorrect installa-
3. Enter dC330 (012-011) to run the transport motor PL 21.2 Item 8. tion or damage.
4. If the fault persists, install a new, PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12. 3. Enter dC330 (012-101) to activate the compile exit sensor, PL 21.2 Item 9.
4. Enter dC330 (012-013) to energize the transport gate solenoid, PL 21.2 Item 11.
5. If the fault persists, install a new, PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
Procedure
Procedure
WARNING
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove all paper from the finisher and cancel all jobs. Clear any jams and verify the cor-
1. Remove all paper from the finisher and cancel all jobs. Clear any jams and verify the cor-
rect paper is being used and per specifications in GP 26, Media Specifications.
rect paper is being used and per specifications in GP 26, Media Specifications.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Check the compile tray assembly, PL 21.1 Item 3 for incorrect installation or damage. Cor-
3. Check the stacker tray, PL 21.1 Item 6, for incorrect installation or damage. If the tray is
rect the installation of the compile tray and the compile tray belt if necessary.
damaged install a new tray assembly base, PL 21.1 Item 6.
4. Enter dC330 (012-201) to activate the SUB paddle home sensor, PL 21.1 Item 4.
4. Enter dC330 (012-200) to activate the stacker tray no paper & full sensor, PL 21.1 Item
11. 5. Enter dC330 (012-020/) to run the eject belt motor, PL 21.1 Item 5.
5. Enter dC330 (012-060) to run the stacker motor, PL 21.1 Item 5. 6. If the fault persists, install a new, PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
6. If the fault persists, install a new, PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
012-259: Finisher Eject Home Sensor ON Fail 012-283: Finisher Set Clamp Home Sensor ON Fail
012-280: Finisher Eject Home Sensor OFF Fail 012-284: Finisher Set Clamp Home Sensor OFF Fail
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 10 How to Check a Motor. • GP 10 How to Check a Motor.
• GP 11 How to Check a Sensor. • GP 11 How to Check a Sensor.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove all paper from the finisher and cancel all jobs. Clear any jams and verify the cor- 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
rect paper is being used and per specifications in GP 26, Media Specifications. 2. Check the compile tray assembly, PL 21.1 Item 3 for incorrect installation or damage. Cor-
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. rect the installation of the compile tray and the compile tray belt if necessary.
3. Check the compile tray assembly, PL 21.1 Item 3 for incorrect installation or damage. Cor- 3. Enter dC330 (012-020) to activate the set clamp home sensor, PL 21.1 Item 3.
rect the installation of the compile tray and the compile tray belt if necessary.
NOTE: If the eject belt motor rotates continuously, this indicates that the set clamp home
4. Enter dC330 (012-200) to activate the eject home sensor, PL 21.1 Item 3. sensor does not function normally.
5. Enter dC330 (012-020/021) to run the eject belt motor, PL 21.1 Item 5.
4. Enter dC330 (012-020/) to run the eject belt motor, PL 21.1 Item 5.
6. If the fault persists, install a new, PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
5. If the fault persists, install a new, PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
012-290: Staple Cover Interlock 24V Disconnect Fail 012-291: Stapler Fail
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 13 How to Check a Switch • GP 10 How to Check a Motor
Perform the steps that follow: • GP 11 How to Check a Sensor
1. Verify the staple cover, PL 21.2 Item 3 is fully closed and the staple cover interlock switch, Perform the steps that follow:
PL 21.2 Item 5 is engaged. 1. Check the stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7 is clear of all paper, stuck staples, or any
2. Enter dC330 (012-301) to actuate the staple cover interlock switch, PL 21.2 Item 3. other foreign materials.
3. If the fault persists, install a new PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12. 2. Enter dC330. Check the sensors that follow:
• Code 021-220, low staple sensor, PL 21.2 Item 7.
• Code 012-222, staple home sensor, PL 21.2 Item 7.
• Code 012-211, self priming sensor, PL 21.2 Item 7.
3. Enter dC330 (012-301) to run the staple motor.
4. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
a. Stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7.
b. PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
5. If the fault persists, contact Support for further instruction.
Procedure 016-777 An error other than disk full was detected when opening/reading/writing file for com-
WARNING pression conversion/image processing operation.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
016-780 An error other than HDD full was detected when opening/writing file for operation.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
016-798 A HDD unavailable error was returned when the decomposer called the S-image
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
library.
• GP 13 How to Check a Switch
Perform the steps that follow: Procedure
1. Close the staple cover. WARNING
2. Check the staple cover assembly. PL 21.2 Item 3 and verify there is no damage to the
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
cover, hinge, or interlock mechanism. If the staple cover assembly is damaged, install a
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
new staple cover assembly, PL 21.2 Item 3. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
3. Check the stapler assembly. PL 21.2 Item 7 and verify there is no damage to the stapler Perform the steps that follow:
assembly. If the staple assembly is damaged, install a new stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
7.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB and the HDD and all surface mounted mod-
4. Enter dC330 012-301 to activate the staple cover interlock switch, PL 21.2 Item 5.
ules are fully seated.
5. If the fault persists, install a new PWB GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
3. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine.
4. If the fault persists, install a new HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 27
(B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 27 (B600/B610).
016-235 Another internal error causes the XCP function to stop. Procedure
WARNING
Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
WARNING not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Perform the steps that follow:
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Set the current date and time.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item
2. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine. 5 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
NOTE: After HHD Initialize, it may be necessary to verify the Device ID performing
dC132.
1. Check the connection at the ESS PWB and the IIT Assembly, verify P/J1370, P/J1374
and P/J1372 are fully seated.
2. Check the connection at the ESS PWB and the DADF Assembly, verify P/J1371 and P/
J1377 are fully seated.
3. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
a. IIT Assembly, PL 50.1 Item 2
b. DADF Assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
c. ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (B600/B610).
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Enter special boot mode, GP 15, and perform the LONGDIAG MODE routine.
2. Verify the wire harness connections on each board are installed properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
3. Upgrade the Software, GP 9.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. If the fault persists, switch off the machine, GP 4. Unplug the power cord for 2 minutes,
then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform the same operation where the error occurred.
6. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615), PL 18.5 Item 5
(B615_Tall), or PL 18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610) and perform the same operation where the
error occurred.
7. If the fault persists, reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact the Support Department
for instructions.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item
5 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
2. Verify the time and date are set correctly for the customer location.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item
5 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
016-350 Cont SEEP-ROM diagnostic fail 1. 016-609: PCI Option No Support Device Fail PCI Option No Support Device Fail.
016-351 Cont SEEP-ROM diagnostic fail 2. 016-610: PCIEX Option No Support Device Fail PCIEX Option No Support Device Fail.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING Perform the steps that follow:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 2. Update the Software using the Download Mode procedure in GP 15 Special Boot Menu.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 3. If the fault persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item
Perform the steps that follow: 5 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Remove and reseat the eMMC Card.
3. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
4. If the fault persists, contact Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Enter Special Boot Modes, GP 15, then 03. NVRAM INIT MODE. 2. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB and the HDD PL 18.1 Item 27.
CAUTION 3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
Never install a new ESS PWB and a new MCU PWB at the same time. First install the new CAUTION
ESS PWB. If the fault persists, then install a new MCU PWB. Never install a new ESS PWB and a new MCU PWB at the same time. First install the new
3. Install new components as necessary: ESS PWB. If the fault persists, then install a new MCU PWB.
• ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615), PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall), or PL 18.9 Item 4. Install new components as necessary:
5 (B600/B610). • ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615), PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall), or PL 18.9 Item
• MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (B605/B615), PL 18.5 Item 1 (B615_Tall), or PL 18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
1 (B600/B610). • MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (B605/B615), PL 18.5 Item 1 (B615_Tall), or PL 18.9 Item
1 (B600/B610).
NOTE: If the fault persists after startup, perform dC132 to verify all numbers match. Go to
Serial Number Re-Synchronization in GSN (Library 1503). NOTE: If the fault persists after startup, perform dC132 to verify all numbers match. Go to
Serial Number Re-Synchronization in GSN (Library 1503).
016-402 802.1x Authentication time-out (there was no response signal from the authentication
device). The authentication was timed-out because there was no response signal from the
authentication device switch that is physically connected to the machine via the network.
016-403 802.1x Authentication certificate mismatch. The root server certificate for the authenti-
cation server is not stored in the machine or it is mismatched.
016-406 (EAP-TLS) is selected as the authentication method for 802.1x authentication for Net-
work 1, but the SSL client certificate is not set or has been deleted.
Procedure
Advise the customer:
1. Enter the correct user name or password for 802.1x Authentication from the machine
panel.
2. Check the switch settings and network connections of the authentication device switch
that is physically connected to the machine via the network and connect it correctly.
3. Check the settings in the Authentication Device switch that is physically connected to the
machine via the network.
4. 016-403 - Store the Route Certificate for the server certificate (for Network 1)of the
authentication server in the machine.
5. 016-403 -If unable to Obtain the route certificate of the server certificate, disable the
(Server Authentication Inspection) (for Network 1) in the 802.1x setting item of the device.
6. 016-406 - Store the client certificate to this machine SSL and set as SSL client certificate.
7. 016-406 - If the setting of SSL client certificate cannot be made, select other than (EAP-
TLS) as the authentication method.
Procedure 016-408 The package management function has detected the damaged JAR file.
Advise the customer to start ‘Initialize certificate’ under Maintenance.
016-409 The package management function has detected a version mismatch.
016-410 The package management function has detected the invalid definition file.
016-411 The package management function has detected an unsupported class file version.
016-412 The package management function has detected the plug-in has caused an error that
is included in a miscellaneous group of errors.
Procedure
Advise the customer to modify the plug-in, then re-install.
016-431 An internal error has occurred in the 802.1x supplicant function of the machine. An
incorrect protocol signal was received from the authentication server in network 2.
016-432 802.1x setting error of the client certificate of the authentication (network 2).
Procedure
Advise the customer:
1. Repeat the operation.
2. Set the authentication method of network 2 of this device to the same authentication
method as the one set in the authentication server.
3. Check the switch setting or network connection of the (Authentication Device) which is
physically network connected to Network 2 of this machine and connect it correctly.
4. 016-430 Store the Route Certificate for the server certificate (for Network 2) of the
authentication server in the machine.
5. 016-430 If unable to Obtain the route certificate of the server certificate, disable the
(Server Authentication Inspection) for the 802.1x setting item (Network 2) of the device.
6. 016-432 Store the client certificate to this machine SSL and set as SSL client certificate.
7. 016-432 If the setting of SSL client certificate cannot be made, select other than (EAP-
TLS) as the authentication method.
016-454 Dynamic DNS - dynamic update failed. 016-456 A standard time synchronized source message and an asynchronous message was
received from the SNTP server.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Procedure
1. Advise the customer: Perform the steps that follow:
a. Check that DNS server address is set correctly in the device. 1. Advise the customer:
b. Check with the System Administrator whether the DNS server settings that allow a. Check that the SNTP server address is set correctly in the device.
dynamic DNS using IPv6 address have been set. b. Check the time on the machine, if the time on the machine is incorrect, manually set
2. If the fault persists, Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. the time.
NOTE: Setting the transfer guarantee level to ‘Low’ may cause the image logs to get
deleted in sequence even before they are transferred.
2. Obtain the device log. Refer to How to Obtain Log Files, GP 37.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. Attempt to reproduce an error according to the operation that was performed when the
error occurred.
5. If the fault persists, contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer check whether the application that sends a print job and the print 1. PS booklet and watermark/UUID cannot be specified at the same time. Advise the cus-
instructions has a problem. tomer cancel either one.
a. If they have no problems, request the customer consult the software vendor produc- 2. Ensure that all connectors between the ESS PWB and the HDD and all surface mounted
ing the application sending the print job for assistance printing from the application. modules on the ESS PWB are fully seated.
2. If the fault persists, obtain a list of printer settings, a job history report, and the print data 3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
with PrintTicket to send to Support and go to the following to resolve the problem,
3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, perform the following steps to Obtain the log files for Support contact:
a. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to
Obtain the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the
NVM (700-530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
b. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection condi-
tions and repeat the operation.
c. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
d. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Attempt to reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
i. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
ii. Check the job settings from the Panel.
iii. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
e. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
f. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer install the SSL client certificate into the device as the LDAP server will The device cannot trust the SSL certificate of the LDAP server. Advise the customer register
request it. the root certificate of the LDAP server SSL certificate in the device.
016-525 LDAP-SSL authentication error 115 has occurred (the server certificate has expired). Procedure
Advise the customer ensure that the address of the LDAP server set in the device matches the
Procedure address of the LDAP server defined in the SSL certificate.
Advise the customer change the LDAP server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, an internal error has occurred in the program. Advise the customer check the PIN, then perform the personal signature scan.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING 1. Go to GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors between the ESS PWB and the HDD and all surface mounted
modules on the ESS PWB are fully seated.
3. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine.
4. If the fault persists, install a new HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 27
(B605/B615)
5. Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 27 (B600/B610).
Procedure Procedure
Have the customer: Have the customer match the time of the PC where the ApeosWare Authentication agent is
1. Update the realm list, using the Update Realm button on the device, or add the domain to installed with the time of the PC where the ActiveDirectory is. Furthermore, if the Windows
the ApeosWare authentication agent. To update the device realm information, perform the Time Service in the PC where the ApeosWare Authentication Agent is installed is stopped,
steps that follow: start it.
a. Press the Authentication Agent button on the Authentication window of the device.
b. The Authentication Agent window appears. Press the Update button.
Procedure
Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Procedure Procedure
The version of the ApeosWare Authentication Agent needs to be upgraded. Have the customer Have the customer correctly set the domain user reference login name or the reference pass-
check that the machine is a product that is supported by the upgraded version of the Apeo- word of the ApeosWare Authentication Agent domain.
sWare Authentication Agent.
Procedure Procedure
Have the customer check that the ApeosWare Authentication Agent can connect to the data- Have the customer wait 5 minutes before authenticating again as the service is overloaded.
base or the active directory.
Procedure Procedure
Have the customer check the ApeosWare Authentication Agent. Have the customer check the ApeosWare Authentication Agent.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer check that all system data that must be set to perform the remote 1. Check that the network cable is connected and check the settings of the Authentication
download are correct. Agent function.
2. If DNS address of the Server is set as the Server name/IP address of the ApeosWare
Authentication Agent in the printer function settings list, check that DNS is enabled.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer make corrections so that the temporary user entries of the Active 1. Advise the customer set the image quality to Normal.
Directory or Authentication Agent do not have the same IC card information. 2. Go to GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
2. Go to GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Perform the steps that follow:
1. During backup, save the FW download file into the dwld directory in the USB memory, 1. Before performing the HDD backup, delete existing backup files through to increase the
connect it the machine, then perform the backup. capacity.
2. During restore, use the same IOT and IIT ROM versions as those during backup. When 2. Before performing USB backup, delete the backup files in the USB memory, or use a PC
performing restore using a USB backup file, also use the same HDD configuration. to delete unnecessary files on the USB memory to increase the capacity.
3. If there is no HDD, use the same ESS ROM versions as well. If the same configuration
cannot be attained, delete the backup file from the panel.
4. If the problem occurred at an attempt to restore a backed-up file from an external place,
check that the ESS/IIT/IOT/fax ROM version is still the same as the version used when
the backed-up file was created. Furthermore, check the device is the same as the one
that generated the backed-up file.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Increase memory size for job ticket on UI Panel.
1. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Before performing the restore using the HDD backup file, delete backup files. 3. Run the job again.
3. For USB backup, check that the USB memory is correctly installed. If the fault persists, 4. Go to GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
use a PC to format the USB Memory.
4. When performing restore using USB backup files, check that the USB memory is correctly
installed. If the fault persists, delete the backup files.
5. If the problem still persists, use a PC to format the USB memory.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer check for a mismatch between parameters specified by the job ticket. Cor- Advise the customer check that the device that receives data can print it onto paper whose
rect the parameters, then resend the job. properties (size/type/weight/color/punched) are specified by job ticket.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to ensure the that software is correctly installed on client that generates 1. Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS and whether the destination
job ticket; operational requirements are met; and software version matches device version. server name has been registered in the DNS.
2. Advise the customer to verify the FTP server hostname is correct.
3. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to set the DNS address or set the destination server address using 1. Advise the customer to check that the network communication between the transfer desti-
IP address. nation FTP server and the machine is available. For example:
2. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction. 2. Check that the server IP address is correct.
3. Check the connection of network cables.
4. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
1. Check that the FTP service of the Server is operating. 1. Check that the login name (user name) and password are correct.
2. Check that the FTP port number of the Server matches the FTP port number that is set on 2. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
the machine.
3. Perform GP 37, to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
NOTE: Ensure the FTP user has proper permissions to the image storage destination.
016-584 When creating a folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the folder cre- 016-587 When deleting a folder in the server after connecting to the FTP server, the deletion
ation has failed. has failed.
Procedure 016-589 Failed to read data from the FTP server after connecting to the FTP server during
scanner (save to PC) FTP transfer.
Advise the customer:
1. If a lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the transfer destination, delete it then retry the job.
Procedure
2. Check that the specified name is a folder name that can be created in the storage destina-
tion. 1. Advise the customer check whether there is access right to the FTP server and grant the
proper rights.
3. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists.
2. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
4. Check that the storage destination has enough free space.
5. Confirm that the FTP user has correct permissions for the scanned image destination.
6. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: 1. Advise the customer set ‘File Name Conflict’ to other than ‘Cancel Job’
1. Check the FTP user has appropriate permissions for the scanned image destination. 2. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
2. If a lock directory (*.LCK) remains in the transfer destination, delete it then retry the job.
3. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
1. When Add is selected for File Name Conflict, check that the file format is not set to Multi- When Add is selected for File Name Conflict, have the customer check that the NEXT-
page. NAME.DAT file is correct.
2. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: WARNING
1. Advise the customer delete unnecessary documents, then repeat the operation. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
2. Upgrade the software, GP 4. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer check that the required optional software is installed and enabled.
Also check that the correct print driver is being used.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
b. Ensure that all connectors between the ESS PWB and the HDD and all surface
mounted modules on the ESS PWB are fully seated.
c. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine.
d. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
i. HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615), PL 18.5 Item 27 (B615_Tall), PL 18.9 Item
27
i. (B600/B610).
ii. ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615), PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall), PL 18.9
Item 5 (B600/B610).
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: WARNING
1. Advise the customer delete unnecessary documents or users, then repeat the operation. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
2. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700- Perform the steps that follow:
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure. 1. Advise the customer:
3. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions a. Remove the conditions that disable sample print.
and repeat the operation. b. If the fault occurred at installation, check whether the operations for Sample Print are
4. Upgrade the software, GP 9. correct.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error 2. Ensure that all connectors and all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWB are fully
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred. seated.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. 3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel. 4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB and the HDD.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. 5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the • HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) PL 18.5 Item 27 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 27
error has occurred. (B600/B610).
7. Contact Service for further instructions. • ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (B600/B610).
4. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB and the HDD. 6. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
5. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
• HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) PL 18.5 Item 27 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 27
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
(B600/B610).
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
• ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (B600/B610). c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
8. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
9. Contact Service for further instructions.
8. Contact Service for further instructions. c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
8. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
9. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer input the correct password to use ESCP form. 1. Ensure that all connectors and all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWB are fully
2. Ensure that all and all surface mounted modules on the ESS PWB are fully seated. seated.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 9. 2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
4. If the fault persists, Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. a. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain b. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB and the HDD and all surface mounted
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700- modules are fully seated.
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure. c. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine.
5. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions d. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
and repeat the operation. i. HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) PL 18.5 Item 27 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9
6. Upgrade the software, GP 9. Item 27 (B600/B610).
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error ii. ESS PWBB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall) or PL
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred. 18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
8. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
9. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING Perform the steps that follow:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do 1. Advise the customer decrease the resolution to reduce the PLW memory.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
Perform the steps that follow: • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
1. Advise the customer: the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
a. Split any internet fax documents that would exceed 2GB in document storage size 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
into several jobs and control the usage amount of memory. 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
b. If there is a large amount of scan or internet fax documents being processed, wait and repeat the operation.
until the other jobs are completed before performing additional jobs. 5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
2. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow: 6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
a. Upgrade the software, GP 9. according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB and the HDD and all surface mounted a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
modules are fully seated. b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine. c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
d. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary: 7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
i. HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) PL 18.5 Item 27 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 error has occurred.
Item 27 (B600/B610). 8. Contact Service for further instructions.
ii. ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer increase the PCL memory size. Increasing the memory for the whole 1. Advise the customer cancel the job then execute the command again.
system will increase the memory to be allocated to the Decomposer in some measure. 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. 3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700- 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure. 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions and repeat the operation.
and repeat the operation. 5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9. 6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred. a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel. c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. 7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
error has occurred. 8. Contact Service for further instructions.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
016-722 Staple position that is not supported by this machine or a paper size that is not sup- Procedure
ported by the Finisher was specified.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer directly scan the document and send it to the FAX recipient.
Procedure
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
1. Advise the customer correct the settings, then execute the command again.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700- and repeat the operation.
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
and repeat the operation. according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9. a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
error has occurred.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer fix, then select the decomposer from the UI or with a command. 1. Advise the customer to switch off paper saving, then print the job again.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. Refer the customer to the User Guide. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer refer to the User Guide to correct the valid range.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
016-732 The decomposer detected that the form specified is not registered. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Advise the customer:
Perform the steps that follow:
a. Check if the destination address has been entered correctly.
1. Advise the customer resend the data or form data.
b. Set a correct DNS server address.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. If the fault persists, perform GP 4.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
3. If the fault persists, Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure. 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
and repeat the operation.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred. error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to source a download file that has the same model with the device VerUP
1. Advise the customer to obtain the download data again, then retry the job. then retry the job.
2. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Ensure that the cable connected to the device is secured correctly, then retry the job.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to obtain the download data again, then retry the job.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Perform GP 37 to obtain the logs required for contacting Support for further instruction.
016-774 Disk full was detected when opening/writing file for compression type conversion. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
016-775 Disk full was detected when opening/writing file for image processing operation.
1. Advise the customer:
016-778 HDD full was detected when opening/writing file for operation. a. Use the printer driver of the machine to print.
b. Not use ContentsBridge to print a PDF file.
016-981 When accessing it, the HDD is detected being full. c. Request the other party to resend the internet FAX document using a print language
that can be printed by the machine.
Procedure 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer:
a. Split the job into pages in order to prevent the full state. Reduce the resolution if pos-
sible.
b. Delete documents that are no longer needed, such as; mailbox documents, fax send
wait documents, secure print documents and delayed print documents.
c. Retrieve each page from the EWS.
2. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine.
3. Perform an on demand image overwrite on the HDD.
4. If the fault persists install a new HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 27
(B615_Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 27 (B600/B610).
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
016-757 Auditron - Invalid User NOTE: When Xerox Standard Accounting has been enabled, the user account has not been
properly specified in the print job data. Enter user account info correctly, then re-send the print
016-758 Auditron - Disabled Function job.
Procedure Procedure
NOTE: When Xerox Standard Accounting has been enabled, a user account has been submit- NOTE: When Xerox Standard accounting has been enabled, the limit on the maximum number
ted without permission to access this service. of registered users has been reached.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer: 1. Additional users can be added to the device with expanded storage options. The produc-
a. Set the new function that is allowed for that account then try again. tivity kit increases the maximum amount of users available for this device.
Perform one of the following: 2. Advise the customer delete unnecessary users or combine user accounts.
• Try a different user account. 3. If the fault persists Upgrade the software, GP 9.
• Configure the printer to permit user access to this feature.
• Request that the Accounting Administrator add access rights to the account.
2. If the fault persists Upgrade the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer resend the job. 1. Advise the customer print in the high speed mode. If the fault persists, use print guaran-
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. teed mode.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain 3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700- • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure. the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
and repeat the operation. 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9. and repeat the operation.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error 5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred. 6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel. a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
error has occurred. 7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
8. Contact Service for further instructions. error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
016-766 The memory capacity allocated by the SMTP server is exceeded. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. Check the email address is correct and is a valid email address.
Advise the customer:
2. If the fault persists Upgrade the software, GP 9.
1. Request the customer contact the SMTP Server Administrator.
2. Retrieve E-mails in the SMTP Server HD.
3. Check the server capacity.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer check that the sender address is correct. Advise the customer contact the network administrator for Advise and ensure that the SMTP
server supports DSN.
1. Check the sender address is valid and has been spelled correctly.
2. Check that the correct SMTP authentication settings have been enabled.
3. Check the SMTP user name and password.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer release the direct FAX job prohibition (set the target system to 0). Perform the steps that follow:
2. Obtain the job logs (UI, Report, EWS, SSMI applications). 1. Advise the customer set the DNS address. Or, set the scan data repository address using
IP address.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer: 1. Advise the customer:
a. If a failure occurred during Salutation/FAX to Email, attempt to retrieve each page a. Repeat the operation.
from the mailbox via the web browser. b. Reduce the scan resolution to 400dpi or less then repeat the operation.
b. For occurrences when the password, or signature is specified by the Digital Certifi- 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
cate, perform the steps that follow.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• Check the validity of the certificate.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
• Set the correct date and time of the device. the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
c. When scanning is done with the TWAIN driver, change the file format to JFIF, single- 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
page TIFF. 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
d. Switch off FIPS mode, or remove PDF encryption setting in the instructions docu- and repeat the operation.
ment. 5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
e. Set to Single File for Each Page, or set the Image Format setting to Drawing Object. 6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: WARNING
1. Advise the customer: Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
a. Correctly set the device TCP/IP, IP address, subnet mask and gateway. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
b. Check that the SMTP server, IP address or hostname and port number are correct. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
c. Check network connectivity to the printer from the server, and from the printer to the Perform the steps that follow:
server. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
d. Check whether characters other than ASCII are set for the host name of the device. 2. Ensure all paper trays are loaded.
Set the host name of the device to ASCII characters. 3. If this occurs when sending email, Advise the customer:
2. If the fault persists Upgrade the software, GP 9. – Reduce the resolution then resend it.
– Reduce the size then resend it.
– Reduce the number of pages and separate the job into several batches when send-
ing.
– Set the output color to Black then resend it.
4. If the fault persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
b. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB and the HDD and all surface mounted
modules are fully seated.
c. Enter GP 15 Special Boot Mode, perform the HDD Initialize Mode routine.
d. If the fault persists, install new components as necessary:
i. HDD, PL 18.1 Item 27 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 27 (B615_Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 27 (B600/B610).
ii. ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (B605/B615) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (B615_Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (B600/B610).
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer: 1. Advise the customer repeat the operation.
a. Reduce resolution (image to send quality), then resend the job. 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
b. Reduce magnification, then resend the job. 3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
c. Increase the maximum fragment quantity. • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
error has occurred. 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
3. Contact Service for further instructions. 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer check the me dis content from the PC. Check whether the print file 1. Advise the customer check the me dis content from the PC. Check whether the print file
attribute data is displayed on the PC, then reset the settings. images are displayed on the PC, then reset the settings.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. 2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. 3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700- the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure. 530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions 4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation. and repeat the operation.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9. 5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error 6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred. according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel. b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the 7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred. error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions. 8. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure 016-911 The paper requested by the print specification is not loaded or different sizes and/or
types of paper switching are requested from the same tray.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer repeat the operation.
Procedure
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
1. Advise the customer correctly load paper.
error has occurred.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. Contact Service for further instructions.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
016-918 Job Held by Toner M Life End (Operation) 016-940 Different size settings for side 1 and side 2 were detected after the job had started
with 2-Sided Print specified.
016-919 Job Held by Toner C Life End (Operation)
016-941 Mixed size/direction set for the page with images was detected after the job had
Procedure started with Booklet specified.
Perform the steps that follow:
016-942 Different size settings for side 1 and side 2 were detected after the pages with 2-Sided
1. Install a new TONER CARTRIDGE(Y/M/C) as the error requires. Print specified had been deleted.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. 016-943 Different size settings for side 1 and side 2 were detected after the document and sep-
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to Obtain arators had been inserted for the pages with 2-Sided Print specified.
the log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-
530) to’1’ after completing the procedure. 016-944 The document collate setting for the pages including the cover with images or the doc-
ument with separators with Document Attachment specified was detected.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
016-945 The documents that do not support 2-Sided Print has been inserted for the pages for
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9. 2-Sided Print.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred. 016-946 A document or separator has been inserted between Cover pages or Separator
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. pages.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. 016-947 The system detected that no tray is loaded with paper for Auto Paper Selection after
the job for which the paper for APS (Auto Paper Selection) was selected or APS was set has
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
started.
error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions. 016-948 The covers with images, separators, or blank pages were detected after the job had
started with Booklet specified.
016-949 The document with a different size/orientation from the operated page was tried to be
inserted for the job with Attachment specified.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer re-submit the job with the correct settings.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer:
1. Have the customer reduce the number of documents, reduce the resolution, or increase 1. Check the job parameter settings, then re-run the job.
the compression ratio if the job is multi-value scan. 2. Check the response packet from the job limit server.
2. If the fault persists, upgrade the software, GP 9. 3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
5. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer change the user privileges. 1. Advise the customer lower the number of password digits.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs, GP 37, immediately after the
error has occurred.
4. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure
Advise the customer verify the network status and the operating status of JobLimit Server.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer change the SSL operation mode setting to other than STARTTLS Perform the steps that follow:
mode. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs, GP 37, immediately after the
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9. error has occurred.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs, GP 37, immediately after the 2. Check the following:
error has occurred. • If the fault occurred in TLS Mode it may be due to an incorrect port number. Check
4. Contact Service for further instructions. the Port Number settings of the SMTP Server.
• Confirm that the SSL or TLS encryption type matches the appropriate port the cus-
tomer selected.
3. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
4. Contact Service for further instructions.
NOTE: This problem can also be fixed by switching off the machines SSL Server Verifica-
tion setting. This will render the machine unable to guarantee the authenticity of the
SMTP server that it is connecting to.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Advise the customer disable the offline status of the destination device.
1. Advise the customer check that network communication between the POP server and the 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
machine is available: error has occurred.
a. Check that the POP server IP address that is set in the device is correct. 3. Contact Service for further instructions.
b. Check the connection of network cables.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37, immediately after the
error has occurred.
3. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure
Advise the customer:
1. Check whether the transfer destination server, etc. and the machine are able to communi-
cate via the network.
2. Check whether it is possible to log in to the transfer destination server, etc. by using the
specified user name and password.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer refer to the error details in the job undelivered transmission report, then
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. take appropriate action.
2. Advise the customer revise the custom transfer plug-in and then reinstall it.
017-770 The server name does not match the server address of the server certificate.
Procedure
Advise the customer:
1. Check that the clock of the POP server and the machine are correct. If the clock is correct,
change the POP server SSL certificate to one that is valid.
2. Check the validity period settings of the POP server certificate.
3. Check that the server name that are registered in the POP server certificate and the
server address are correct.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
5. Contact Service for further instructions.
NOTE: This fault can also be fixed by switching off the machines SSL Server Verification
setting. This will render the machine unable to guarantee the authenticity of the POP
server that it is connecting to.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer check the setting related to the Netlog function.
1. Darken the density during scan.
2. Turn off the blank suppression instruction.
3. Adjust the following settings.
a. 840-223: Blank Page Detection Formatter Control Parameter:
• Lower the File Size Based Blank Paper Detection Level.
b. 840-224: Blank Page Detection Formatter Control Parameter:
• Lower the Black Dot Count Based Blank Paper Detection Level.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. Advise the customer check if there is any issues on the network route to the Syslog server.
017-777 The sending queue became full and discarded the message sending request. Procedure
Advise the customer check if the IP address of the machine is set.
Procedure
Advise the customer check the status of the Syslog server, address value of the Syslog that is
set to the device, whether there is an issue in the network route between the device and the
Syslog server, or a network cable failure.
Procedure Procedure
Check the connection state of the network cable. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer disable the auto delete setting or change the timer setting (1-7200
minutes) to an appropriate value.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
3. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure
Advise the customer set the permissions as required.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Request the customer that there is a check mark at Account Invalid for the relevant user in 1. Advise the customer try the following:
the active directory of the LDAP authentication destination server. The server has been • Change the setting to a different IP address
set to prohibit access from the relevant user.
• Change the IP address to DHCP
2. Advise the customer consult with the Server Administrator.
2. Verify, in the client environment:
a. The client service will not aggregate information from the remote environment, or,
b. Even if information is aggregated, there is no possibility of multiple billing, allowing
setting of the same IP address by the following C/L.
• 701-644:TCP/IP information: Setting state of the same IP address(IPv4).
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Change the machine's IPv4 address or the IPv4 address of the device on the network.
2. If the fault persists,
a. For a manual address setting, check if the IP address set by the customer is being
used somewhere else.
b. For BOOTP and DHCP settings, check with the customer regarding the configuration
of the servers.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer: 1. Advise the customer:
a. Change the IPv6 manual setting address of this machine to the IPv6 address that a. Change the IPv6 manual setting address of this machine or the IPv6 address of the
can be used in the machine address. network upper apparatus.
b. Check if the IPv6 address that was automatically set as manual address is a valid b. Check if the IPv6 address that was automatically set as manual address is a valid
address. address.
2. Contact Service for further instructions. 2. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Change the machine's IPv6 ‘Manual Address’ or the IPv6 address of the device on the 1. Advise the customer change the IPv6 address of the device on the network with the dupli-
network. cate address to resolve the problem.
2. If the fault persists, check if the IP address automatically set as the manual address is 2. If the fault persists, Check if the IPv6 address automatically set as the ‘Link-local Address’
being used somewhere else. is being used somewhere else.
018-440 When activating the Wi-Fi Direct of this machine, the setting for the IPv6 mode is 018-501 The device could not connect to the CA server when trying to do CA authentication.
detected in the conflict configuration information related to the IP protocol stack. The device has failed in communication.
018-441 When activating the Wi-Fi Direct of this machine, the setting for the 5GHz mode is 018-503 The device received a message from the CA server and was waiting for a JRM/UI
detected in the conflict Wi-Fi Band. judgment, but received no response in time.
Procedure 018-504 During communication between the device and the CA server for authentication, a
mismatch in Session ID between both has occurred.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer change the setting for the Wi-Fi Network Type of this machine to 018-506 During communication between the device and the CA server, a mismatch in Field ID
Infrastructure.
between both has occurred.
2. Advise the customer change the setting for the configuration information related to the IP
protocol stack of this machine to Dual or the IPv4 mode. 018-507 The CA authentication server requested an entry of user info, and the server deter-
3. Advise the customer change the setting for the Wi-Fi Band of this machine to Auto or the mined that the entered info was different.
2.4GHz mode.
018-508 In process of CA authentication, the device has received a server exception message
from the CA authentication server.
Procedure
Advise the customer:
1. Make the IOT and the controller the same in agreement info.
2. Set up the server certificate, or set the CA function to off.
3. Check the address of the CA server, or recheck the connection to the network.
4. Retry the authentication operation.
5. Enter the correct user name and password.
6. Check the status of the CA server.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
8. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer check whether the settings in the job template are correct. For example: Advise the customer:
1. A setting that cannot be used in the device is set. 1. Check whether the port and network related settings that are required to execute the scan
2. The transfer repository is not set correctly. job are set properly in the device.
3. A nonexistent template name is specified. 2. Check whether the DNS server setting is correct.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,i mediately after the error 3. Check whether the port for the specified protocol is activate.
has occurred. 4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,i mediately after the error
5. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance. has occurred.
5. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure 018-527 CUI scan: internal error occurred when processing job template.
Perform the steps that follow:
018-528 CUI scan: soap argument error.
1. Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the same operation again.
2. If the fault persists, perform the 016-210, 016-506, 016-777, 016-780, 016-798 HDD Error 018-529 CUI scan: duplication of soap job startup request.
RAP.
018-531 Other errors during start-up of a CUI scan job.
Procedure
1. Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the same operation again.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to either perform the correct authentication operation or check the Advise the customer:
limitations (color mode, no. of sheets, services) that was set by the administrator. 1. Check the shared name specified then set the correct name.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the 2. Check that the user has the right to access the shared name specified.
error has occurred.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance. error has occurred.
4. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
5. Update printer firmware (software).
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. Check the limit for the number of users that can connect to the shared folder. 1. Check that the drive and directory that are specified in the HTTP server that sends
2. Check whether the number of users who are concurrently using the server has exceeded scanned documents are accessible.
the maximum number. 2. Repeat the operation.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the 3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred. error has occurred.
4. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance. 4. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
5. Update printer firmware (software).
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer ensure that the file name that is specified in the scanned document Advise the customer:
destination does not contain any invalid characters. 1. Check that the directory that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the server exists.
error has occurred. 2. Check that the file name that is specified in the scanned document destination HTTP
3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance. server exists.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
4. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server has been registered in 1. Check whether the proxy server name that is set in the device has been registered in the
the DNS. DNS.
2. Check whether it is connected to the DNS server. 2. Check whether it is connected to the DNS server.
3. Check whether the DNS server address is set. 3. Check whether the DNS server address is set.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the 4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred. error has occurred.
5. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance. 5. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the 1. Check whether the scanned document destination HTTP server is accessible from the
PC. PC.
2. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP 2. Check whether the SSL client certificate is set correctly in the device.
server is registered in the device. 3. Check whether a valid device certificate is registered in the scanned document destina-
3. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the scanned document destination HTTP tion HTTP server.
server is valid. For example, check the items that follow: 4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
• The certificate has not expired yet. error has occurred.
• The time that is set in the device is correct. 5. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
• It is not in the discard list.
• The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certif-
icate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the scanned document destination HTTP server, dis-
able the device certificate validation.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
6. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer repeat the operation. 1. Advise the customer set File Name Conflict to other than Cancel Job.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred. error has occurred.
3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance. 3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure Procedure
1. Request the customer that when Add is selected for File Name Conflict, check that the file 1. Request the customer that when Add is selected for File Name Conflict, check that the
format is not set to Multi-page. NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred. error has occurred.
3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance. 3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer perform the same operation again without multiple machines 1. Advise the customer change the file name/destination folder on the scan server. Else,
accessing the same folder in the same server. move or delete the files in the destination folder.
NOTE: Change file name of scan, or move or delete files from the file server using file 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
name.
3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs GP 37,immediately after the
error has occurred.
3. Contact Support with the required logs for further assistance.
018-700 Network stack is not initialized fail. 018-702 LDAP protocol error 02 at address book operation (operation error).
018-706 LDAP protocol error 06 at address book operation (comparison request result is true).
018-707 LDAP protocol error 07 at address book operation (the specified authentication
method is not supported).
018-708 LDAP protocol error 08 at address book operation (strong authentication is required)
Procedure
1. Verify that print jobs are printing or print a configuration report and verify that network
setup settings are indicated. The printer is operational or the configuration report indi-
cates valid network settings.
2. Check for damage with the network connection. If there is no damage then there is a
problem with the network. Inform the customer that the network requires service.
3. There is a problem with the LDAP setups on the machine or with the remote LDAP server.
Advise the customer verify the machine LDAP setups. If the check is good, there may be
a problem with the remote LDAP server.
4. See GP 36 How to Manually Setup a Network Connection, for further help or advise the
customer to contact their network administrator.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Verify the machine is communicating on the network.
3. If the fault persists, print a network configuration report and verify the LDAP setup on the
machine to the remote LDAP server is correct.
4. If the network settings are correct and connectivity is still lost, Advise the customer to con-
tact their network administrator.
Procedure 018-740 Connection error of certificate has occurred during communication through XMPP
protocol with Google server.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer confirm the network connection status, network settings status with
the system administrator.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
1. Advise the customer confirm with the network administrator the correct root CA certificate
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530) is present, certificate authentication settings are correct.
to’1’ after completing the procedure. 2. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
3. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
and repeat the operation. log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to’1’ after completing the procedure.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred. and repeat the operation.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. 4. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel. 5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
6. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
7. Contact Service for further instructions.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
6. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
7. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Request the customer that the user Kerbeors password set on the Kerbeors server has
1. Advise the customer confirm with the network administrator the network (SSL Communi- expired, it is necessary to ask the server administrator to extend the expiration date of it.
cation) connection status, SSL settings status.
2. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to’1’ after completing the procedure.
3. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
6. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
7. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer check if a higher CA certificate in the user SmartCard is registered with Advise the customer check if the certificate in the user SmartCard is valid. If it has become
the device. If not, register it with the device. invalid or expired, renew it, or if the Kerberos server prohibits the use of the certificate, it is nec-
essary to ask the server administrator to authorise the server permit it.
018-743 A network related (proxy connection) error has occurred when communicating with
Google server via HTTP.
018-744 A network related (DNS name resolution) error has occurred when communicating
with Google server via HTTP.
018-745 A network related (proxy connection) error has occurred when communicating with
Google server via XMPP protocol.
018-746 A network related (DNS name resolution) error has occurred when communicating
with Google server via XMPP protocol.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer check the network connection status, settings status as the network
might be congested.
2. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to’1’ after completing the procedure.
4. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
5. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
8. Contact Service for further instructions.
018-733 LDAP protocol error 33 at address book operation (wrong alias). 018-741 Other internal error has occurred during GCP module (XMPP library) processing.
018-734 LDAP protocol error 34 at address book operation (wrong DN format, wrong pass- Procedure
word). Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer check the settings.
018-735 LDAP protocol error 35 at address book operation (object is terminated).
2. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
018-736 LDAP protocol error 36 at address book operation (cannot refer to alias). • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to’0’ to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
Procedure to’1’ after completing the procedure.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 3. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
2. Verify the machine is communicating on the network.
4. Upgrade the software, GP 9.
3. If the fault persists, print a network configuration report and verify the LDAP setup on the
machine to the remote LDAP server is correct. 5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Get the procedures for reproducing an error
according to the operation that was performed when the error occurred.
4. If the network settings are correct and connectivity is still lost, Advise the customer to con-
tact their network administrator. a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
6. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
7. Contact Service for further instructions.
NOTE: If the situation does not improve, it is highly likely that there is a problem occurring
at the server.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the
error has occurred.
4. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. If the transfer destination server belongs to the Active Directory domain, check for delays 1. For communication that goes beyond the subnet, check the DNS server settings and
in the communication between transfer destination server and Domain Controller by the check whether the server name address can be resolved correctly.
method that follows: 2. If there is no problem, login to the SMB server from another PC using the same user
a. Check whether it is taking a long time to access the transfer destination server from name and check whether a file can be written to the same storage destination on that
a PC client. SMB server. If write is possible, try to perform the same operation again from the
b. If it is taking a long time, consult with the System Administrator. machine.
2. If there is no problem, login to the SMB server from another PC using the same user 3. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
name and check whether a file can be written to the same storage destination on that 4. Contact Service for further instructions.
SMB server. If write is possible, try to perform the same operation again from the
machine.
NOTE: If the situation does not improve, there is a possibility of bad connection status in
the customers environment. Advise them to consult with the System Administrator.
018-759 SMB Scan image storage location or file name error. Procedure
1. Advise the customer check the settings of the distributed file system (DFS) with the sys-
Procedure tem administrator
Advise the customer: 2. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
1. Check whether the storage location is correct. 3. Contact Service for further instructions.
2. Check whether the specified file name is one that can be created on the SMB server.
3. Check whether the storage destination or file name of the scan image that is set at the
main unit contains restricted characters.
4. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
5. Contact Service for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. Check whether the usage condition at the storage destination PC has caused all the 1. Check whether an anti-virus software is operating at the storage destination PC. If operat-
memory to be used. ing, reduce the number of document copies to make the transmission file smaller.
2. Terminate the applications that are currently not in use. 2. Check that there is no cable unplugged or any issues with the router or the hub in the net-
3. Check the memory usage status and perform upgrades to increase the memory. work route.
4. Reboot the server. 3. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred.
5. Obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error has occurred. 4. Contact Service for further instructions.
6. Contact Service for further instructions.
018-771 LDAP protocol error 71 at address book operation (influence on multiple DSA).
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Verify the machine is communicating on the network.
3. If the fault persists, print a network configuration report and verify the LDAP setup on the
machine to the remote LDAP server is correct.
4. If the network settings are correct and connectivity is still lost, Advise the customer to con-
tact their network administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Check if the network cable is connected. 2. Verify the machine is communicating on the network.
2. If it is connected, check the start up state of the target request server. 3. If the fault persists, print a network configuration report and verify the LDAP setup on the
3. Check whether the shared name that is set at the main unit is only specified by a period. machine to the remote LDAP server is correct.
4. Check that the server name is correct. 4. If the network settings are correct and connectivity is still lost, Advise the customer to con-
tact their network administrator.
5. Contact Service for further instructions.
018-787 LDAP protocol error 87 at address book operation (mistake in definition of search fil-
ter).
018-789 LDAP protocol error 89 at address book operation (an incorrect parameter was
passed).
018-791 LDAP protocol error 91 at address book operation (server connection prohibited).
018-793 LDAP protocol error 93 at address book operation (result is not returned).
018-794 LDAP protocol error 94 at address book operation (result no longer exist).
018-795 LDAP protocol error 95 at address book operation (result still exist).
018-796 LDAP protocol error 96 at address book operation (client loop detected).
018-797 LDAP protocol error 97 at address book operation (maximum hop number for refer-
ence is exceeded).
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Verify the machine is communicating on the network.
3. If the fault persists, print a network configuration report and verify the LDAP setup on the
machine to the remote LDAP server is correct.
4. If the network settings are correct and connectivity is still lost, Advise the customer to con-
tact their network administrator.
Procedure
1. Use Chain-Link (920-001) to change “Installation Status” to “Not Installed” and retry the
operation.
2. Switch off. then switch on the machine. GP 4.
3. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files and contact Support for further assistance.
024-313 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 3. It was detected that the data size of the backed up Procedure
IOT NVM Data was different from the size instructed by the restore request. 1. Switch off. then switch on the machine. GP 4.
024-314 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 4. A backup data read error was detected.
024-315 IOT NVM Backup Restore Fail 5. When restore was requested, it was detected that
the backup data did not exist.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off. then switch on the machine. GP 4.
2. Install a new MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1
(SFP)
024-343 MCU sending error detected by controller (message length error). 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine GP 4.
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu
024-345 MCU sending error detected by controller (check code error). GP 15.
3. Check the wire harness connections on the ESS PWB and MCU PWB are installed prop-
024-346 MCU sending error detected by controller (parity error detected by the IOT. erly and fully seated.
4. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
024-347 MCU sending error detected by controller (framing error detected by the IOT).
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
024-348 MCU sending error detected by controller (overrun error detected by the IOT). to “1” after completing the procedure.
5. Update the Software, GP 9.
024-349 MCU sending error detected by controller (receive abort detected by the IOT after the
header had been recognized). 6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
7. If the error persists, obtain the log file again, GP 37.
024-350 MCU receiving error detected by controller (sequence number of the received mes- 8. Switch off the machine GP 4.
sage packet is incorrect). 9. Disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
10. Switch on the machine, GP 4
024-351 MCU receiving error detected by controller (packet number error).
11. Perform the same operation where the error occurred.
024-352 MCU receiving error detected by controller (message length error). 12. If the error persists, install a new MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP
Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred.
024-353 MCU receiving error detected by controller (check code error).
024-354 MCU receiving error detected by controller (parity error detected by the UART).
024-355 MCU receiving error detected by controller (framing error detected by the UART).
024-356 MCU receiving overrun error detected by controller (overrun error detected by the
UART).
024-357 MCU receiving error detected by controller (receiving abort detected after the header
had been recognized).
024-358 Print sequence error detected by controller (paper feed and paper output that are not
applicable to the number detected.)
024-359 MCU transmission receiving error detected by controller (invalid parameter used).
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off. then switch on the machine. GP 4.
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Refer GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
4. Refer GP 15, Special Booting Menu to perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONG-
DIAG MODE.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
6. If the error persists, obtain the log file again, GP 37.
7. Switch off the machine, GP 4.
8. Disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
9. Switch on the machine, GP 4.
10. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5
(SFP). and perform the same operation where the error occurred.
11. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact the Support Department for instructions.
Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary.
024-617 Serial No. Backup1 was restored automatically. 024-620 Product No. Backup1 was restored automatically.
024-618 Serial No. Backup2 was restored automatically. 024-621 Product No. Backup2 was restored automatically.
Procedure Procedure
For information only, no service action necessary. For information only, no service action necessary.
Procedure Procedure
Refer the customer the User Guide to use paper or media that is within specification. Clear the paper jam.
Procedure Procedure
1. Delete document and attempt to restore the template from the driver. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs. 1. Advise the customer to use paper that is within specification or to print simplex. Refer to
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the GP 26, Paper and Media Size Specifications.
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530) 2. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
to “1” after completing the procedure. • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
3. Repeat the operation which failed. log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
4. Update the Software, GP 9. to “1” after completing the procedure.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine GP 4. 3. Repeat the operation which failed.
6. Ask the customer for the procedures to reproducing an error according to the operation 4. Update the Software, GP 9.
that was performed when the error occurred. 5. Switch off, then switch on the machine GP 4.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. 6. Ask the customer for the procedures to reproducing an error according to the operation
b. Check the job settings from the Panel. that was performed when the error occurred.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
7. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs. b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
8. Contact Support for further instructions. c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
8. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure 024-747 The specified combination of parameters (stored file size, paper size, paper tray,
duplex command, output tray) cannot be executed or continued.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to use paper that is within specification or to print face up. Refer to
GP 26, Paper and Media Size Specifications.
Procedure
Advise the customer to use the correct print parameters.
2. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
3. Repeat the operation which failed.
4. Update the Software, GP 9.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine GP 4.
6. Ask the customer for the procedures to reproducing an error according to the operation
that was performed when the error occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
7. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
8. Contact Support for further instructions.
BSD-ON: BSD 07: Registration and no paper sensor BSD-ON: BSD 07: Registration and no paper sensor
024-911 Size mismatch tray 2, measured length mismatch. 024-912 Size mismatch tray 3, measured length mismatch.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
BSD-ON: BSD 07: Registration and no paper sensor BSD-ON: Finisher diagram 3
024-913 Size mismatch tray 4, measured length mismatch. BSD-ON: Finisher diagram 4
024-960 Tray 4 size mismatch. 024-916 One of the following conditions was met during Mix Full position detection:
Procedure • When paper size of the next job (either in feed direction or width direction) is larger than
the uppermost paper size loaded for the previous job.
WARNING
• When changed to staple mode when the uppermost paper size loaded for the previous
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
job is less than 279.4mm.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
• When uppermost paper size loaded for the previous job is unknown’.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: WARNING
• GP 11, How to Check a Sensor Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Advise the customer to:
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
a. Use paper that is within specification. Refer to GP 26, Media Specifications.
• GP 11, How to Check a Sensor.
b. Ensure the paper in tray 4, PL 9.1 Item 1, is the correct size for the job.
Perform the steps that follow:
c. Ensure tray 4 is closed.
1. Advise the customer to remove the paper from the stacker.
2. Enter dC330. Enter the following codes to check the sensors:
2. Enter dC330, code 012-230. Check the stacker tray no-paper & full sensor PL 21.1 Item
• 071-119 option feeder 4 size sensor 0
11.
• 071-120 option feeder 4 size sensor 1
3. Install a new, PWBA GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
• 071-121 option feeder 4 size sensor 2
• 071-103 registration sensor
3. Install new components as necessary:
a. Registration sensor, PL 15.2 Item 13.
b. Switch assembly size OPF 550, PL 10.1 Item 12.
c. MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 1
(SFP).
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure
1. Advise the customer to add paper to tray 1 if the tray is empty.
2. Check the registration feeder chute assembly for damage. If the registration feeder chute
assembly is damaged, install a new registration feeder chute assembly, PL 15.2 Item 1.
3. Enter dC330, code 071-101 to check the tray 1 no paper sensor PL 15.2 Item 22.
4. Check the wiring between the no paper sensor and the MCU PWB for damage. Repair the
harness is necessary. If the fault persists, install a new no paper sensor, PL 15.2 Item 22.
5. If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 1
(MFP Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
BSD-ON: BSD 31: OPF 550 PWB, OPT Feeder No Paper Sensor 024-954 The MSI tray is empty.
BSD-ON: BSD 07: Registration and no paper sensor 024-966 The paper specified for printing cannot be detected.
024-958 Check Paper Selection - Check Bypass Tray Settings. Initial Actions
• Check the correct setting for paper size and type are selected in the UI.
WARNING • Add the correct paper to the appropriate Tray.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Procedure death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Add paper to the MSI tray.
2. Check the MSI frame assembly for damage. If the MSI frame assembly is damaged, Procedure
install a new MSI frame assembly, PL 13.1 Item 1.
Perform the steps that follow:
3. Enter dC330, code 071-100 to activate the MSI no paper sensor, PL 13.1 Item 8. If the
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
MSI no paper sensor fails to activate, install a new MSI no paper sensor, PL 13.1 Item 8.
2. If the error persists, perform the steps that follow:
4. Enter dC330, code 071-103 to activate the registration sensor, PL 15.2 Item 13. If the reg-
istration sensor fails to activate, install a new registration sensor, PL 15.2 Item 13. a. Ensure that all connectors and surface mounted modules on the ESS PWB and the
5. If the fault persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 1 MCU PWB are fully seated.
(MFP Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP). b. Update the Software, GP 9.
1. In staple operation, staple home sensor does not detect off-on within the specified time.
Procedure
2. After reverse operation, staple home sensor detects on within the specified time.
WARNING
Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Cancel the staple job in progress.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
2. If the error persists, perform the steps that follow:
• GP 10, How to Check a Motor.
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
• GP 11, How to Check a Sensor
b. Ensure that all connectors and surface mounted modules on the ESS PWB and the
MCU PWB are fully seated. Perform the steps that follow:
c. Update the Software, GP 9. 1. Clear any paper jam in the paper path and in the stapler.
2. Check the stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7 for damage. If the stapler assembly is dam-
aged, install a new stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7.
3. Enter dC330, code 012-222 to activate the stapler home sensor, PL 21.2 Item 7. If the self
stapler home sensor activates, go to step 4. If the stapler home sensor does not activate,
install a new stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7.
4. Enter dC330, code 012-250 to run the stapler home motor, PL 21.2 Item 13. If the stapler
home motor runs, go to step 5. If the stapler home motor does not run, install a new sta-
pler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7.
5. If the error persists, install a new PWBA GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
024-977 At the start of stapling, self priming sensor is OFF. 024-979 Detect Low Staple Sensor ON just before Stapler Motor ON.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 10, How to Check a Motor. • GP 11, How to Check a Sensor
• GP 11, How to Check a Sensor Perform the steps that follow:
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Verify the staple cartridge is installed correctly, reinstall if necessary.
1. Verify the staple cartridge is installed correctly, reinstall if necessary. 2. Enter dC330, code 012-220 to activate the low staple sensor, PL 21.2 Item 7. If the low
2. Enter dC330, code 012-221 to activate the self priming sensor, PL 21.2 Item 7. If the self staple sensor does not activate, install a new stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7.
priming sensor activates, go to step 3. If the self priming sensor does not activate, install a 3. If the error persists, install a new PWBA GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
new stapler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7.
3. Enter dC330, code 012-250 to run the stapler home motor, PL 21.2 Item 7. If the stapler
home motor runs, go to step 3. If the stapler home motor does not run, install a new sta-
pler assembly, PL 21.2 Item 7.
4. Install a new PWBA GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
024-980 Stack Encoder Sensor counted the specified number of sheets for Full Stack (large 024-982 The stacker height sensor 1 did not detect OFF within the specified time in three con-
size/Small size). secutive times.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
• GP 11, How to Check a Sensor • GP 11, How to Check a Sensor
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove the all paper in the tray. 1. Remove the all paper in the tray and vary there are no obstructions of the stacker tray.
2. Enter dC330, code 012-230 to activate the stacker tray no-paper & full sensor, PL 21.1 2. Enter dC330, code 012-230 to activate the stacker tray no-paper & full sensor, PL 21.1
Item 11. If the stacker tray no-paper & full sensor, does not activate, install a new PWBA Item 11.
GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12. 3. Enter dC330, code 012-250 to activate the stacker height sensor 1, PL 21.1 Item 3.
4. Install a new PWBA GPF A4FIN, PL 21.1 Item 12.
5. If the fault persists, install a new finisher.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: For information only, no service action necessary. Advise the customer to wait for approxi-
1. Reduce a resolution send parameter (image-to-send quality) then re-send the job. mately one day until an automatic deletion of documents makes space available. Then re-run
the job.
2. Reduce a magnification send parameter, then re-send the job.
3. Increase the maximum file accumulated data size.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37 How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer:
1. Advise the customer: 1. Reduce the resolution level (scanned-image quality), then re-run the job.
a. Ask the sender of the S/MIME encrypted mail to encrypt the mail by the encryption 2. Reduce the number of documents, then re-run the job.
method (3DES), then re-send it. 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37 How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
b. Set RAPS140 Authentication Mode of the device to off. has occurred.
2. If the error persists, perform GP 37 How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
has occurred.
3. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to set up the device configuration info on the printer driver screen so 1. Advise the customer to shorten the specified storage location or the filename.
that it can match the actual configuration, 2. If the error persists, perform GP 37 How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
3. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure
Advise the customer:
1. Check whether the transfer destination WSD scan client and the machine are able to
communicate via the network. For example:
• Check whether the WSD scan client has enough free capacity.
• Check the connection of the network cable.
2. When using DADF, perform the scan using Windows FAX & Scan. Or, change to the
platen to perform the scan.
3. 026-729 Only - If the error persists, perform GP 37 How to Obtain Log Files, immediately
after the error has occurred.
4. 026-729 Only - Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure
Advise the customer to correct the PIN number, print count or password that is specified by
PJL Command, then try again.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 (Manual Setting Address) of this machine to the 1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 (Manual Setting Address) of this machine to the
IPv6 address that can be used as the self-machine address. IPv6 address that can be used as the self-machine address.
2. If the error persists, Advise the customer to contact their network administrator. 2. If the error persists, Advise the customer to contact their network administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to change the IPv6 Link Local Address of this device or the IPv6 1. Advise the customer to change the duplicated IP address of the PC.
address of the other device on the network. 2. If the error persists, Advise the customer to contact their network administrator.
2. If the error persists, Advise the customer to contact their network administrator.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the 1. Check with the System Administrator that the mail server has been launched and the
environment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC). environment is already used for other purposes (such as for PC).
2. Check that a correct SMTP server address is reflected in the device setting list: 2. Check that a correct POP server address is reflected in the device setting list:
a. When the SMTP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP a. When the POP server address is specified using IP address, set a correct IP
address. address.
b. When the SMTP server address is specified using FQDN, check that the FQDN b. When the POP server address is specified using FQDN, check that FQDN name is
name is correct. Also check that a correct DNS server address is set for the device, correct. Also check that a correct DNS server address is set for the device, and set a
and set a correct IP address. correct IP address.
3. If the error persists, Advise the customer to contact their network administrator. 3. If the error persists, Advise the customer to contact their network administrator.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to wait for a while, then perform the operation again.
2. Investigate the SMTP Server information (name and version of the server that is in use) or
the provider name (in case of outsourcing).(*1)
3. Refer to the SMTP Communication Protocol Report and check whether any 4xx or 5xx
error response were notified from the server. If any 4xx or 5xx response was notified, this
mean that the problem could be at the server side. Use the information obtained from 1.2
to search the Web for troubleshooting information (*2) and perform the corrective
actions.(*1) It is also possible
a. *1 It is also possible to trace the provider and which server is being used by using
the Host Name that is listed in the 220 response (the very first packet) from the Mail
Server.
b. *2 (Reference sample for troubleshooting information search result) Obtained infor-
mation: Exchange 2007 Server, 550 5.7.1 Client does not have permissions to send
as this sender (error information from the server). Search keywords: 550 5.7.1 Client
does not have permissions to send as this sender.
c. Microsoft Search engine: Google Search result: Exchange 2007 transport access
permission model Reason: The Sender that is specified in the MAIL FROM field of
the SMTP protocol does not have the access permission to send to this server.
d. The ms-Exch-SMTP-Submit access permission must be granted to the Sender.
4. Ask the customer To Contact Their Network Administrator.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check if the specified user has read/write access in a file or folder 1. Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS. Or, check whether the SMB
in the specified place. server name of the transfer destination has been registered in the DNS.
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred. has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions. 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to set the DNS server address. Or, set the SMB server address of Advise the customer:
the transfer destination using IP address. 1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination SMB server and this
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. machine is available, by checking:
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error a. The connection of network cables.
has occurred. b. The TCP/IP settings.
4. Contact Support for further instructions. c. For communication through port 137 (UDP), port 138 (UDP) and port 139 (TCP).
2. Check the network settings that follow to see if the computer operates as an SMB server.
a. Check that the file sharing service for Microsoft network is enabled.
b. Check that NetBIOS over TCP/IP is enabled in the TCP/IP settings.
c. Check the file sharing service (communications through port 137 (UDP), port 138
(UDP) and port 139 (TCP) is allowed in the firewall settings.
3. For communication that goes beyond the subnet, check the WINS server settings and
check whether the server name address can be resolved correctly.
4. Check whether the NetBIOS interface device at the transfer destination SMB server has
started.
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 1. Advise the customer to change the file name/destination folder on the SMB scan server.
2. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error Else, move or delete the files in the destination folder.
has occurred. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. Contact Support for further instructions. 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer: Advise the customer:
1. Check if the specified file name already exists on the server. 1. Manually delete the lock directory (*.LCK) from the transfer destination.
2. Check if the specified file name is in use. 2. Check whether a folder with the same name as the specified name already exists.
3. Check if the specified file name already exists as a directory. 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
4. Check if a prohibited character was detected in the specified file name. 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. has occurred.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 5. Contact Support for further instructions.
has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to manually delete the lock directory (*.LCK) from the transfer desti- 1. Advise the customer to check that the storage destination has enough free space.
nation, then retry the job. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
2. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred. has occurred.
3. Contact Support for further instructions. 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to log in to the SMB server from another PC using the same user 1. Advise the customer to set File Name Conflict to other than Cancel Job.
name and check whether they can write a file into the same storage destination on that 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
SMB server.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. has occurred.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check that the file format is not set to Multi-page When Add is 1. Advise the customer to check that the NEXTNAME.DAT file is correct when Add is
selected for File Name Conflict. selected for File Name Conflict.
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred. has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions. 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure 027-548 SMB protocol error (4-008), the scan user name specification is incorrect
1. Advise the customer to check that the server name of the SMB server is correct.
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
Procedure
1. Advise the customer to have the system administrator set the domain name and user
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
name correctly.
has occurred.
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
027-578 SMB protocol error (4-038), communication timeout has occurred. Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check if the SMB client has been started.
Procedure 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
1. Advise the customer to check that the authentication server and the device can communi-
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
cate through the network (check the network group, TCP/IP settings, check the communi-
has occurred.
cation at Port No. 137 (UDP)/Port No. 138 (UDP)/Port No. 139 (TCP).
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check with the system administrator for the time period when log- 1. Advise the customer to obtain a valid password from the system administrator.
ging in is allowed. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error has occurred.
has occurred. 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check that the domain of the destination mail address is not desig- 1. Make sure the network cable is connected correctly.
nated as a prohibited domain. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error has occurred.
has occurred. 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure 027-721 Application interface destination during web service interface - not found.
Advise the customer to:
1. Check with the DNS server administrator on the existence of DNS/MX record.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Check that the DNS server settings of the device is set properly.
1. Advise the customer to check that the DNS server address is set properly. Check that the
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
PC running the application interface is registered in DNS.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
has occurred.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Request the customer: 1. Advise the customer to check the user name and password to be entered for creating a
a. That if a number of documents is specified for scanning, scan one document and job flow.
store it. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
b. That when scanning and storing are successful, change the application interface 3. Ask the customer for the procedures to duplicate the error.
timeout value. If scanning and storing are not successful, a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
c. To check that the scan document can be uploaded from the PC browser. When b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
uploading is successful, change the application interface timeout value.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
3. Ask the customer for the procedures to duplicate the error. has occurred.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. 5. Contact Support for further instructions.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
027-725 Application interface during web service interface - job operation failure. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
027-726 Application interface during web service interface - unknown job status.
1. Advise the customer to check the parameters for creating a job flow.
Procedure 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Ask the customer for the procedures to duplicate the error.
Perform the steps that follow:
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
1. Advise the customer to check that the application interface is working correctly.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
3. Ask the customer for the procedures to duplicate the error.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
has occurred.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check that the server disk is normal and has free space, and then 1. Advise the customer to check that the SSL setting for the job template server is enabled.
retry the operation. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
2. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred. has occurred.
3. Contact Support for further instructions. 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to enable the SSL settings of the machine or specify HTTP as the
1. Using the HTTPS protocol, check whether the job template server is accessible from the transfer protocol.
PC. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
2. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is registered in the 3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
device. has occurred.
3. Check whether the SSL server certificate of the job template server is valid. For example, 4. Contact Support for further instructions.
check that:
a. The certificate has not expired yet.
b. The time that is set in the device is correct.
c. It is not in the discard list.
d. The certificate path of the SSL server certificate and import any necessary CA certif-
icate.
4. If the certificate is not registered in the job template server, disable the device certificate
validation.
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to enable the server certificate validation settings of the machine or Perform the steps that follow:
disable the server certificate validation setting during transfer. 1. Advise the customer to check that Read Authorization is established for the storage desti-
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. nation server directory set as a resource.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the resource of the storage destination path from the client PC. 1. Advise the customer to check the user information:
2. Update the Software, GP 9. a. Set the log-in name and password in the job template file storage destination.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. b. From some other PC connected to the network, check that they can log in with the
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error relevant account.
has occurred. c. From a client PC, set a login name and password as a resource
5. Contact Support for further instructions. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to set the parameters related to the job template pool server. 1. Advise the customer to check the connection to the DNS and whether the job template
2. Update the Software, GP 9. pool server domain name has been registered in the DNS.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
has occurred. 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
5. Contact Support for further instructions. has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
(1) With Internet FAX Document E-mail and Internet FAX Transfer prohibited, Internet FAX Procedure
Document E-mail and Internet FAX Transfer instructions were received.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to re-examine the contents of the instruction.
(2) Printing Scan and Printer documents was instructed during interruption.
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
Procedure 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
Perform the steps that follow: 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
1. For Internet FAX received document, enable the transfer setting. has occurred.
2. Clear interruption and print when printing Scan and Printer documents during interruption. 5. Contact Support for further instructions.
3. Update the Software, GP 9.
4. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
5. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
6. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to enable the service.
a. Not link the box to the instruction that requires user entry. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
b. Set preset values for the items in the instruction requiring user entry. 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
2. Update the Software, GP 9. 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. has occurred.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 5. Contact Support for further instructions.
has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to check the system data setting of the XDW/PDF signature and the 1. Advise the customer to:
signature setting that is specified in the instruction. If the system data setting is different a. Check the server/network.
from the setting in the instruction, either change the instruction or change the system
b. Check the communication route that can be reached.
data.
c. Ping the DNS server.
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
d. Check if the CA certificate of the destination server is imported to the device by
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
using the browser.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
e. Check if the device does not go through the proxy that SSL has the function to check
has occurred. the communication details SSL.
5. Contact Support for further instructions. f. Specify the device as out of the SSL proxy target.
g. Check if the server supports the relevant encryption method.
h. Set the client certificate to the device.
i. Import the client certificate to the device and set to use as the client certificate.
j. Check the daylight saving time difference to see if the date/time of the device is cor-
rect.
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check whether the login name and password have been set correctly. 1. Check whether the machines network settings are set correctly.
2. Consult with the Network Administrator to check the authentication settings at the LDAP 2. Consult with the network administrator to check the connection status from the machine
Server. to the reference server.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Advise the customer to:
1. Advise the customer to: 1. If on-demand print for multiple documents was instructed using the external access func-
a. Check if the parameter setting specified in XDOD client is out of system specifica- tion, reduce the number of documents then retry it.
tions. 2. Either extend the print on demand print duration or set it to 0.
b. Check the XDOD client and controller versions. 3. Update the Software, GP 9.
2. Update the Software, GP 9. 4. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 5. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error has occurred.
has occurred. 6. Contact Support for further instructions.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Update the Software, GP 9. Advise the customer to:
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 1. Check if the external accounting server is working correctly.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 2. Connect the cable correctly.
has occurred. 3. Set up the device so that it can correctly communicate with the external accounting
4. Contact Support for further instructions. server.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that network communication between the transfer destination AirPrint scan client 1. Check that the scan document destination WebDAV server is registered in DNS.
and the machine is available. 2. Check that the DNS server connection is good.
2. Check whether the AirPrint scan client has enough free capacity. 3. Check that the DNS server is correctly configured.
3. Check the network cable connection. 4. Update the Software, GP 9.
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check that the proxy server name that is configured on the machine is registered in DNS. 1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server.
2. Check that the DNS server connection is good. 2. Check the scan document SSL settings of the destination WebDAV server.
3. Check that the address of the DNS server is correctly configured. 3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name.
4. Update the Software, GP 9. 4. Update the Software, GP 9.
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred. has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions. 7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Advise the customer to:
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. 1. Check the network cable connection.
2. Make sure the device is registered. 2. Check the access from the PC to the Scan document destination WebDAV server.
3. Make sure the scan SSL server certificate of the document destination WebDAV server is 3. Make sure the correct network interface is selected.
correct. For example: 4. Update the Software, GP 9.
a. Check the expiration date. 5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
b. Check that the device time is correct. 6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
c. Check that they are not on the dispenser list. has occurred.
d. Check the SSL server certificate of the certification path. 7. Contact Support for further instructions.
4. If the Scan document certificate to the destination WebDAV server is not registered, dis-
able the certificate validation of the device.
5. Update the Software, GP 9.
6. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
7. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
8. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure
1. Perform the operation again.
2. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files then contact Service for fur-
ther instruction.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to send mail without setting SMTP-AUTH. Advise the customer to contact the network administrator to check what SMTP authentication
method the server uses.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check if the authentication information (user name/password) has 1. Advise the customer to select the network interface that can be used.
been set correctly. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
2. Update the Software, GP 9. 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error has occurred.
has occurred. 5. Contact Support for further instructions.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to split the scan data. 1. Advise the customer to check the redirection settings of the WebDAV server.
2. Update the Software, GP 9. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
4. Obtain logs immediately after the error has occurred without turning the power off and on. 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
Perform GP 37, and contact Support with the logs as required. has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: 1. Advise the customer to check that the user name and password for the proxy server that
1. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. was configured on the device are correct.
2. Check the login user name and password. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Check the scan document destination WebDAV server name and server path name. 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
4. Update the Software, GP 9. 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
027-793 Error number 400 from the WebDAV server has been answered. 027-791 WebDAV server method not allowed.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 1. Check the connection to the WebDAV server.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 2. Check if read/write access in a file or folder in the specified place is set.
has occurred. 3. Check the specified file path.
5. Contact Support for further instructions. 4. Update the Software, GP 9.
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to make sure WebDAV storage path and directory specified in the 1. Advise the customer to make sure WebDAV storage path and directory specified in the
server exist. server exist.
2. Update the Software, GP 9. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred. has occurred.
5. Contact Support for further instructions. 5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advise the customer to: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check that the WebDAV server is up and running. 1. Update the Software, GP 9.
2. Check the access from the PC to the scan document destination WebDAV server. 2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. Update the Software, GP 9. 3. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
4. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
5. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
has occurred. to “1” after completing the procedure.
6. Contact Support for further instructions. 4. Ask the customer for the procedures to duplicate the error.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
5. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
6. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advise the customer to specify the output destination that can be processed by the 1. Advise the customer to select another document, then repeat the operation.
device, then repeat the operation. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
2. Update the Software, GP 9. 3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 4. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs.
4. Enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files to gather machine logs. • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530) to “1” after completing the procedure.
to “1” after completing the procedure. 5. Ask the customer for the procedures to duplicate the error.
5. Ask the customer for the procedures to duplicate the error. a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution. b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel. c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error. 6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error has occurred.
has occurred. 7. Contact Support for further instructions.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
1. Advise the customer to check whether or not there is free space in the storage location. WARNING
2. Update the Software, GP 9. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
3. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
4. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
has occurred. Install a new fuser, PL 7.1 Item 1.
5. Contact Support for further instructions.
Headed Block 028-987 ATS/APS No Destination Error, the paper instructed to print cannot be detected.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Procedure
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause WARNING
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
Perform the steps that follow: not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
1. Change the fusing unit to standard mode. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. If the fault persists: Perform the steps that follow:
a. Check the cable between the fuser, PL 7.1 Item 1 and the MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1, 1. Advise the customer to:
PL 18.5 Item 1 or PL 18.9 Item 1. a. Use paper that is within specification. Refer to GP 26, Media Specifications.
b. Install a new fuser, PL 7.1 Item 1. b. Ensure the paper is the correct size for the job.
c. Restart the print job during user intervention.
BSD-ON:BSD 07: Registration and no paper sensor 029-701 The response from the server does not meet the specifications of the WebDAV.
Procedure Procedure
1. Update the Software, GP 9. Advise the customer to:
2. Advise the customer to perform the same operation. 1. Check the connection of the network cable.
3. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error 2. Check the transfer destination AirPrint scan client status.
has occurred.
4. Contact Support for further instructions.
029-716 In Ethernet 1 mode, communication time-out of the storage destination URL of the
PACFile proxy auto-detection function (WPAD).
Procedure
Advise the customer to:
1. Check the connection of the network cable.
2. Check the default gateway configuration.
3. Check the subnet mask setting.
4. Check the DNS server address setting.
5. Update the Software, GP 9.
6. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
7. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
8. Contact Support for further instructions.
029-708 In WiFi mode, incorrect format of the storage destination URL of PACFile acquired by 029-717 In Ethernet 1 mode, failed to locate the storage destination URL of PACFile the proxy
the proxy auto- detection function (WPAD). auto-detection function (WPAD).
029-714 In Ethernet 1 mode, failed to find the proxy settings file (PACFile) in the proxy auto- Procedure
matic detection function (WPAD).
1. Request the customer network administrator Check the Internet connection proxy settings
“automatically detect” is not checked.
029-715 In Ethernet 1 mode, incorrect format of the storage destination URL of PACFile
2. The correct proxy settings for the customer network must be manually entered for the
acquired by the proxy auto- detection function (WPAD).
PACFile to be found. Advise the customer to network administrator correct the proxy
issues.
Procedure
3. Update the Software, GP 9.
Advise the customer to:
4. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
1. Check the URL setting of PACFile storage destination server.
5. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
2. Check the URL information PACFile set in the DHCP server is correct (if the proxy server has occurred.
acquisition method is WPAD).
3. If the URL is correct, check that the PACFile to the HTTP server has been registered. 6. Contact Support for further instructions.
4. Update the Software, GP 9.
5. Advise the customer to perform the same operation.
6. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, immediately after the error
has occurred.
7. Contact Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advice the customer switch off the FAX send billing function or change to a single-line installa- Perform dC301 NVM initialization.
tion.
033-318: Image Processing Error 033-329 A FAX cont error was detected.
033-324: USB State Change Error 033-340 The Pflite communication log write function returned an error.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING Perform the steps that follow:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 2. Enter GP 15, Special Boot Modes, and initialize the HDD and NVM.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 3. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Perform the steps that follow: Support for further instruction.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated.
3. Update the Software, GP 9.
4. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
5. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
6. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
7. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
033-331 Foip controller init fail. When transitioning to sleep, there is no response from FAX controller 2.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated.
3. Update the Software, GP 9.
4. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
5. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
6. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
7. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
033-528 RTN was sent.
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9. 033-529 RTN was received.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advice the customer request for the sender to check the remote machine for an error,
then re-send.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated.
6. Update the Software, GP 9.
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
033-537 A conflict between outgoing and incoming calls has occurred and the sending was 033-566 The FAX card is unable to call because there is no dial.
canceled.
Procedure
033-540 During the image processing for FAX print format, an error has occurred. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advice the customer specify the appropriate address by using the speed dial number that
033-568 During FAX communication, there was no response from the FCM for the specified
is registered with the correct FAX address number, etc.
time.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
033-575 Polarity inversion was detected. 3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
033-577 An underrun has occurred at the modem.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated.
Procedure 6. Update the Software, GP 9.
Perform the steps that follow:
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
1. Advice the customer repeat the operation.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again. 9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI. 10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con- Support for further instruction.
nected and fully seated.
6. Update the Software, GP 9.
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
For information only. No service action necessary. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Use a phone to establish communications, then Advice the customer repeat the opera-
tion.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated.
6. Update the Software, GP 9.
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
033-556 The remote ID was not sent from the remote machine. The sending password and the 033-565 The total number of requested addresses exceeded the number defined by the speci-
remote ID do not match. fications.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advice the customer consult with the operator of the remote machine on whether the 1. Advice the customer wait for the jobs that are waiting to be sent to decrease or reduce the
wrong machine password was input. number of addresses, then try again.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again. 3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI. 4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con- 5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated. nected and fully seated.
6. Update the Software, GP 9. 6. Update the Software, GP 9.
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI. 7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and 8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated. LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9. 9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact 10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction. Support for further instruction.
033-569 The paper tray status is such that paper with orientation that can be output can only 033-570 An error due to power off during transmission. the power switch was turned off, or the
be supplied from the SMH. system was reset.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advice the customer specify the correct paper size and check that the paper trays are cor- 1. Advice the customer:
rectly loaded with the paper guides correctly adjusted. a. Wait for a while then check the FAX function settings and dial numbers, then resend
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. data if needed.
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again. b. Check the self-terminal status and line status, then perform the operation again.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI. 2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con- 3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
nected and fully seated. 4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
6. Update the Software, GP 9. 5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI. nected and fully seated.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and 6. Update the Software, GP 9.
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated. 7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9. 8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
Support for further instruction. 9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
033-588 T38 packet loss causing unrecoverable error was detected. Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure 1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Advice the customer wait for some of the jobs that are queued to be completed or can-
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
celed, then retry the operation.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again. nected and fully seated.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI. 6. Update the Software, GP 9.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con- 7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
nected and fully seated.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
6. Update the Software, GP 9.
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
Support for further instruction.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
1. Advice the customer: 2. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
a. Repeat the operation if the fault occurs while sending. 3. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
b. Request for the sender to re-send if the fault occurs when receiving. 4. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
c. Check the remote machine for an error. nected and fully seated.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 5. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again. 6. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
4. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI. 7. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
5. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated. 8. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
6. Update the Software, GP 9. 9. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
7. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
8. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
9. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
10. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
033-741 When transferring image data to the FAX card, the conditions for sending the
response to the FAX card did not match.
033-743 When receiving image data from the FAX card, the conditions for sending the
response to the FAX card did not match.
033-744 When receiving image data from the FAX card, the conditions for sending the
response to the FAX card did not match.
033-745 When receiving image data from the FAX card, the conditions for sending the
response to the FAX card did not match.
033-746 When transferring image data to the FAX card, the conditions for sending the
response to the FAX card did not match.
033-750 During formatting, when image data was retrieved from the FAX card, even though the
image data was determined to be free from error, extension failed.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advice the customer repeat the operation.
2. Advice the customer break up the number pages or reduce the number of images in the
send operation.
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
4. Check the remote machine and then request for the sender to send again.
5. Check the line status and that a dial tone is heard from the UI.
6. Check the FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9 for correct installation and all harnesses are con-
nected and fully seated.
7. Update the Software, GP 9.
8. Check for a dial tone in the UI.
9. Check the LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 for loose connections between the FAX PWB and
LVPS PWB and that all connectors are fully seated.
10. Install a new FAX PWB, PL 18.1 Item 9.
11. If the error persists, enter GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files, to acquire logs and contact
Support for further instruction.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Enter GP 15, Special Boot Modes and initialize the NVM.
4. If the error persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP
Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
Procedure 041-604 Humidity Sensor value is outside the upper and lower limit range.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
2. Update the Software, GP 9.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Enter GP 15, Special Boot Modes and initialize the NVM.
2. Install a new CTD sensor assembly, REP 6.1.
4. If the error persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP
Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
GP 10, How to Check a Motor. GP 10, How to Check a Motor.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Enter diagnostics GP 1. 2. Enter diagnostics GP 1.
3. Enter dC330 (042-003), and check the rotation of the rear fan PL 4.1 Item 5. 3. Enter dC330 (071-061), and check the rotation of the drive motor assembly.
4. Exit diagnostics, GP 1. 4. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
5. If the error persists, install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP 5. Check the wiring between the drive motor assembly and the MCU PWB, verify P/J571
Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP). and P/J570 are fully seated and no open circuits.
6. Rotate the rear fan manually looking for any signs of wear or resistance to rotation. 6. Check the drive gear for wear, damage or bearing blockage.
7. Check the wiring at the rear fan and the LVPS PWB, verify P/J289, Is fully seated. 7. Check the load towards the drive motor assembly, install new components as necessary:
8. Check wiring between the LVPS PWB and the MCU PWB verify each cable of P/J284 • Drive motor assembly, PL 3.1 Item 7.
and P/J280 is continuous. 8. Install new components as necessary:
9. Install a new rear fan PL 4.1 Item 5. 9. If the error persists, install new components as necessary:
10. Install a new LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 16 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 • MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
Item 16 (SFP).
• ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary: Refer to the procedure that follows as necessary:
GP 10, How to Check a Motor. GP 10, How to Check a Motor.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Enter diagnostics GP 1. 2. Enter diagnostics GP 1.
3. Enter dC330 (042-001), and check the rotation of the main fan PL 4.1 Item 1, the error 3. Enter dC330 (042-003), and check the rotation of the sub fan PL 4.1 Item 3, the error per-
persists, sists,
4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1
(SFP). (SFP).
5. Exit diagnostics, GP 1. 5. Exit diagnostics, GP 1.
6. Rotate the main fan manually looking for any signs of wear or resistance to rotation. 6. Rotate the sub fan manually looking for any signs of wear or resistance to rotation.
7. Check the connections at the main fan and the LVPS PWB, verify P/J289 is fully seated. 7. Check the wiring at the sub fan and the LVPS PWB, verify P/J294 and P/J293 are fully
8. Check the connections at the LVPS PWB and the MCU PWB, verify P/J284 and P/J280 seated.
are fully seated. 8. Check the wiring at the LVPS PWB and the MCU PWB, verify P/J284 and P/J280 are
9. Check continuity between the LVPS PWB and the MCU PWB verify each cable of P/J284 fully seated.
and P/J280 is continuous. 9. Install a new sub fan, PL 4.1 Item 3.
10. Install a new fusing assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1. 10. Install a new LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 16 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9
11. Install a new LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 16 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 16 (SFP).
Item 16 (SFP).
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Procedure death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Check the wiring between the MCU PWB and the ESS PWB and verify the connectors 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
are fully seated. 2. Update the Software, GP 9.
3. Update the Software, GP 9. 3. Check the harness between the MCU PWB and the ESS PWB and verify the connectors
4. If the error persists, install a new, ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP are fully seated.
Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP). 4. Install new components in order as necessary:
• ESS MCU FCC, PL 18.1 Item 2 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 2 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 2
(SFP).
• MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
• ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC connected at the ESS PWB, the following steps are to be
observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC connec-
tor will allow insertion and lock on its own.
CAUTION
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 1, Proper FFC Cable Removal.
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC connected at the ESS PWB, the following steps are to be
observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC connec-
tor will allow insertion and lock on its own. Figure 2 Cable Perpendicular Insertion
CAUTION
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 1, Proper FFC Cable Removal.
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Check the harness between the IOT and Finisher and verify the connector are fully
seated.
058-311 Over Temperature on Fusing Assembly Detected 059-315 Fusing Assembly HR STS Center Over Temperature Fail - Center temperature
beyond abnormal temperature detection limit, continuously detected more than specified
058-315 STS Sensor Fail Detected abnormality detection count.
058-316 Fusing Unit HB STS Center Low Temperature Fail - Center temperature below WARNING
abnormal temperature detection limit, continuously detected more than specified abnormality
Do not handle the fuser components until they have cooled. Some fuser components
detection count. operate at hot temperatures and can produce serious personal injury if touched.
CAUTION
058-317 Fusing Ep U4 ShortHeater Slowheat Center Fail - Center temperature not rising as
normally expected within the specified time to heat the Center. Printing has been suspended because inside of the Printer is extraordinarily hot. Wait until the
error message turns off with the power to the Printer remained on.
WARNING Procedure
Do not handle the fuser components until they have cooled. Some fuser components WARNING
operate at hot temperatures and can produce serious personal injury if touched.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
CAUTION
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Printing has been suspended because inside of the Printer is extraordinarily hot. Wait until the death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
error message turns off with the power to the Printer remained on. Refer to the following procedures:
Procedure
Perform the 010-329 to 010-346 fusing assembly HR RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Refer to the following procedures:
WARNING
Do not handle the fuser components until they have cooled. Some fuser components
operate at hot temperatures and can produce serious personal injury if touched.
CAUTION
Printing has been suspended because inside of the Printer is extraordinarily hot. Wait until the
error message turns off with the power to the Printer remained on.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Remove any remaining paper from the fusing assembly.
2. If the error persists, install a new fusing assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
060-343 LPH DATA Fail C Large pixel count error between the video output and LPH. Image 061-357 LPH DL Fail K ASIC register error during IBY initial DL check.
abnormality may occur.
061-362 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error from LPH). It may occur
060-344 LPH DATA Fail K Large pixel count error between the video output and LPH. Image due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
abnormality may occur.
061-363 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error from LPH). It may occur
060-349 LPH Reset Fail Y LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
external noise.
061-364 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error from LPH). It may occur
060-350 LPH Reset Fail C LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
external noise.
061-365 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error from LPH). It may occur
060-351 LPH Reset Fail M LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an due to external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
external noise.
061-366 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error to LPH). It may occur
060-352 LPH Reset Fail K LPH reset due to a noise was detected. Possibly caused by an due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
external noise.
061-367 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error to LPH). It may occur
Procedure due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
WARNING 061-368 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error to LPH). It may occur
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 061-369 Communication error between ESS and LPH (data read error to LPH). It may occur
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
2. Verify the connections between LPH where failure is occurring and the ESS PWB at P/
J1363. the error persists, 061-370 Communication error between ESS and LPH (error in the communication IC or cable).
It may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
• Install a new LPH color head assembly, PL 2.1 Item 1.
3. Check the LPH Xerographic CRUM FFC, for excessive wear or breakage.
061-371 Communication error between ESS and LPH (error in the communication IC or cable).
• Install a new, LPH Xerographic CRUM FFC. It may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
4. If the error persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP
Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP). 061-372 Communication error between ESS and LPH (error in the communication IC or cable).
• After installing a new ESS PWB and the problem continues call Support for further It may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
instruction
061-373 Communication error between ESS and LPH (error in the communication IC or cable).
It may occur due to an external noise, poor connection of FFC, poor power supply, etc.
061-390 Large pixel count error between the video output and LPH. Image abnormality may
occur.
061-391 Large pixel count error between the video output and LPH. Image abnormality may
occur.
061-361 LPH Config Fail K Model number of installed LPH could be incorrect. Memory inside
of LPH could be defective.
Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4
2. Verify the correct LPH PL 2.1, is installed for the pertinent Y,M,C,K error.
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Clean the scanner platen and the white stripe.
3. Install a new IIT Assembly, PL 50.1 Item 2.
4. Install a new DADF Assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
5. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5
(SFP).
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4
2. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5 2. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5
(SFP). (SFP).
Procedure
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Clean the document glass and the white stripe.
3. Check the wiring between the ESS PWB P/J1371 and the DADF assembly P/J1377 for
an open circuit, short circuit or poor contact.
4. Install new components as necessary:
• DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
• ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
1. Enter dC330
• code 071-010 for Tray2
• code 071-020 for Tray3
• code 071-030 for Tray4
• code 071-040 for Tray5
2. Check the OPF feeder motor operation, PL 10.1 Item 18. The OPF feeder motor operates
properly;
a. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL
18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
If the error persists,
• Rotate the OPF feeder motor manually checking for resistance or overload in rota-
tion.
• Check the wiring and continuity between the OPT path paper sensor and the 550
OPF PWB. and verify P/J804 and P/J803 are fully seated and no opens in the har-
ness exist and no opens in the harness exist.
• Install new components as necessary:
a. HCF feeder assembly, PL 11.1 Item 5.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check for obstructions in the paper path and remove. 1. Prepare a new feed and separator roll kit, PL 10.3 Item 98 for end of life replacement
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. soon.
3. Check the 550 OPF kit assembly or the HCF and verify correct installation.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Reseat the Optional 550- Sheet Feeder. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4 2. If the error persists, install a new Main Drive assembly REP 3.1.
3. If the error persists, install new components as necessary:
• Install a new Optional 550-Sheet Feeder, PL 10.2 Item 1.
• Install a new Harness assembly OPF, PL 18.3 Item 6.
• Install a new Harness assembly OPF 2C, PL 10.1 Item 17.
• MCU PWB REP 18.16 (MFP), REP 18.1 (SFP).
089-603 RAD sensor detection failure or A1/C Patch forming failure: Valid sample block count
Procedure
is less than specified count when RAD Sensor OUT during A1/C Patch detection. WARNING
When cleaning this product, use the designated cleaning materials exclusive to it. Other
(Only to register on History) cleaning materials may result in poor performance of the product. Never use aerosol
cleaners to avoid catching fire and explosion.
089-604 RAD sensor detection failure or B Patch forming failure: Valid sample block count is
less than specified count when RAD Sensor IN during B Patch detection of #1(Yellow) color.
WARNING
(Only to register on History) Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
089-606 RAD sensor detection failure or B Patch forming failure: Valid sample block count is death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury
less than specified count when RAD Sensor OUT during B Patch detection of #1(Yellow) color. Clean the CTD (RAD) Sensor:
1. Turn the printer off, GP 4
(Only to register on History)
2. Pull up the handle lever of the rear cover, and open the rear cover.
089-607 RAD sensor detection failure or B Patch forming failure: Valid sample block count is 3. Clean the CTD sensor with a clean and dry cotton swab.
less than specified count when RAD Sensor IN during B Patch detection of #2(Magenta) color.
089-609 RAD sensor detection failure or B Patch forming failure: Valid sample block count is
less than specified count when RAD Sensor OUT during B Patch detection of #2(Magenta)
color.
089-610 RAD sensor detection failure or B Patch forming failure: Valid sample block count is
less than specified count when RAD Sensor IN during B Patch detection of #3(Cyan) color.
089-612 RAD sensor detection failure or B Patch forming failure: Valid sample block count is
less than specified count when RAD Sensor OUT during B Patch detection of #3(Cyan) color.
089-629 During LED light amount correction of gain correction, sensor output voltage value on
the IBT belt is abnormal (OUT side) (Only to register on History)
089-674 During LED light amount correction of gain correction, LED light amount is not con-
verged (IN side) (Only to register on History)
089-676 During LED light amount correction of gain correction, LED light amount is not con-
verged (OUT side) (Only to register on History)
089-677 During LED light amount correction of gain correction, sensor output voltage value on
the IBT belt is abnormal (IN side) (Only to register on History)
089-679 During LED light amount correction of gain correction, sensor output voltage value on
the IBT belt is abnormal (OUT side) (Only to register on History)
i. HVPS PWB, PL 18.2 Item 2 (MFP), PL 18.6 Item 2 (MFP Tall), PL 18.10 Item 2 091-921: DRUM CRUM K Not Position
(SFP). 091-922: DRUM CRUM M Data Broken
ii. MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1 091-923: DRUM CRUM C Data Broken
(SFP). 091-924: DRUM CRUM Y Data Mismatch
091-925: DRUM CRUM M Data Mismatch
091-926: DRUM CRUM C Data Mismatch
091-927: DRUM CRUM Y Not Position
091-928: DRUM CRUM M Not Position
091-929: DRUM CRUM C Not Position
Initial Actions
1. Check if the customer tried another drum cartridge, the error may be the drum cartridge is
bad and needs replaced.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Remove, then reinstall the DRUM cartridge.
3. Verify the connection terminal of the CRUM inside the XERO/DEVE CRU assembly
(YMCK) is not broken or damaged.
a. Install a new Xerographic Developer CRU assembly PL 8.1 Item 1.
4. Check the DRUM cartridge CRUM harness and verify all connections are fully seated and
no opens in the harness exist.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
092-314 ATC C System Fail DRUM density in the developer unit as detected by the ATC sen- 092-319 ADC M Patch System Fail
sor abnormal. This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum val-
ues in the ATC sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value. 1. Detected (TC/SAD patch abnormal - pale color) Measurement result of potential/density
patch shows abnormally pale color. DRUM cartridge became empty (DRUM recovery
092-315 ATC K System Fail DRUM density in the developer unit as detected by the ATC sen- does not work), although DRUM cartridge is not supposed to be empty.
sor abnormal. This fault occurs when the difference between the maximum and minimum val-
2. DRUM Cartridge Shane mode DRUM cartridge became empty (DRUM recovery does not
ues in the ATC sensor measurement set is lower than the threshold value. work), although DRUM cartridge is not supposed to be empty.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4,
2. Shake the toner cartridge well and install to the IOT again.
3. Reseat the DRUM cartridge.
4. Install a new toner cartridge (YMCK), PL 5.1 Item 11 (Y), PL 5.1 Item 12 (M), PL 5.1 Item
13 (C), PL 5.1 Item 14 (K).
5. Install a new Xerographic Developer CRU assembly PL 8.1 Item 1.
1. Cancel the error upon successful toner recovery by opening and closing the front inter- 2. Install a new Color Toner Density (CTD) Sensor Assembly.
lock. (Error can also be canceled upon successful toner recovery by turning the power off
and on.)
2. Shake the toner cartridge well and install to the IOT again.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the area between the dispenser assembly and the CRUM inside the toner car-
tridge) is clean (without any foreign objects).
2. Check the toner cartridge (CYMK) is installed properly.
3. Check the connection terminal of the CRUM inside the Toner Cartridge (YMCK) is not
broken or damaged. The terminal is broken or damaged,
• Install a new toner cartridge (YMCK), PL 5.1 Item 11 (Y), PL 5.1 Item 12 (M), PL 5.1
Item 13 (C), PL 5.1 Item 14 (K).
4. Check the connection terminal of the dispenser assembly (YMCK) is not broken or dam-
aged. The terminal is broken or damaged,
• Install a new DISP assembly (YMCK), PL 5.1 Item 2 (Y), PL 5.1 Item 3 (M), PL 5.1
Item 4 (C), PL 5.1 Item 5 (K).
5. Check the wiring and continuity between the dispenser assembly (YMCK) and the MCU
PWB and Check the connections are fully seated and no opens in the harness exist. If the
error persists,
a. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 1 (SFP).
093-406 DRUM CARTRIDGE Pre Near Empty (K) 1. ADC Empty Detection TC patch density decrease is detected by ADC sensor. Toner is
filled up but density is not regained.
093-407 DRUM CARTRIDGE Pre Near Empty (Y) 2. Counter Empty Detection Toner empty is judged by Dispense time/Pixel counter.
Initial Actions
1. Reseat the Toner Cartridge (YMC).
2. Perform the following steps:
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Check the wiring and continuity between the DISP assembly and the CRUM. Verify that
the toner cartridge is free of dirt and foreign objects, clean as needed.
2. Check the connection terminal of the CRUM inside the toner cartridge for damage. The
terminal is damaged,
a. Install a new toner cartridge PL 5.1 Item 11.
3. Check the connection terminal of the DISP assembly (YMCK) for damage.
a. Install a new DISP assembly PL 5.1 Item 2.
4. Check the wiring and continuity between the DISP assembly (YMCK) and the MCU PWB
and verify all are fully seated and no opens in the harness exist.
5. Check the wiring and continuity at the DISP assembly P/J114 at the MCU PWB are fully
seated and no opens in the harness exist.
6. Check the wiring and continuity between the DISP assembly and the MCU PWB, P/J114
are fully seated and no opens in the harness exist. If the error persists,
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Replace the IBT and reset the counter. PL 6.1 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Reseat the belt unit.
3. Install a new belt unit, PL 6.1 Item 1.
099-397 Fusing Ep U4 Slowheat Center Fail - Temperature is not reached specified degrees
within specified time.
099-399 Fusing Ep U4 Under Side Fail - Abnormal temperature of the Fusing assembly is
detected.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the fusing assembly and the drawer connector of the printer. Verify the fusing
assembly and the drawer connector are installed properly (no bent pin, or any foreign or
burnt objects).
2. Check the wiring and continuity between the Fusing assembly and the MCU PWB and
between the fusing assembly and the LVPS PWB are fully seated and no opens in the
harness exist.
3. Check the wiring and continuity at P/J283. Verify all are fully seated and no opens in the
harness exist.
4. Check the wiring and continuity at P/J270. Verify all are fully seated and no opens in the
harness exist.
5. Check the wiring and continuity between P/J284 and P/J280. Verify all are fully seated
and no opens in the harness exist.
6. Install a new fusing assembly CRU, PL 7.1 Item 1.
7. Install a new LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 16 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9
Item 16 (SFP).
8. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1
(SFP).
003-314 Setting the IOT speed setting key failed during the initial installation by the USB don-
gle.
102-315 Setting the SW Key failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle.
003-316 Setting the supply setting failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle.
003-317 Setting the page pack failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle.
102-318 Setting the country code failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle.
003-319 The NVM rewriting list process failed during the initial installation by the USB dongle.
Initial Actions
Obtain the following information from the customer.
• Job mode (Copy/Scan/Print/Fax)
• Type of job
• Job settings on the UI.
• To reproduce the error for troubleshooting purposes, the following will be required:.
– For network jobs: a copy of the output report and the network configuration.
– For print jobs: the PRN file.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15, Special Boot Mode
3. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
6. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
3. Check the version of Controller ROM. If it is not the latest, download and update to the lat-
est software revision. (Refer to Software Version Upgrade GP 9.)
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
6. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
7. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
8. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
9. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
10. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
11. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
12. Check the connection between the ESS PWB and the customer network or USB-con-
nected workstation, then turn on the power.
13. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Verify that customer is not attempting to make photo copies of documents protected by
law such as currency, government bonds, postage stamps, etc.
2. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
4. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP)
116-211 Connection cable disconnected. 116-220 The downloader that processes software downloads within the ESS failed to initialize
during transition into download mode.
Procedure
WARNING Procedure
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do WARNING
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
Perform the steps that follow: death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Check the wiring and continuity of the front USB harness assembly PL 18.1 Item 14 and 1. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
verify no damage or opens in the harness exist. • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
3. If the error persists, install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
(MFP Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP). to “1” after completing the procedure.
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15, Special Boot Mode
3. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
6. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
7. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation where the error occurred.
8. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
9. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error per-
sists,
10. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
116-313 The encryption key was set up but the HDD itself was not encrypted. Initial Actions
Request the customer to check network connection and settings.This error can be displayed if
Procedure the printer is set to obtain a TCP/IP address from a router with DHCP, but it is not connected to
WARNING a DHCP router
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause Procedure
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Perform the steps that follow:
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
1. Disconnect and reconnect the hard disk harness.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
2. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the Perform the steps that follow:
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530) 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
to “1” after completing the procedure.
2. Verify the eMMC PWB is fully seated in the socket of the ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5
3. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
(MFP),PL 18.5 Item 5 (SFP).
Refer to GP 15, Special Boot Mode
3. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
4. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
4. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
a. Verify the machine software version is the latest revision, download and install the
6. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
latest software if it is not. (Refer to Software Version Upgrade.)
7. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
5. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
8. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation where the error occurred.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
9. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
the same operation creating the error. to “1” after completing the procedure.
10. Perform GP 15, STORAGE DEVICE INITIALIZE MODE in the Special Boot Mode proce- 6. Check the connection between the ESS PWB and the customer network or USB-con-
dure. If the error persists, nected workstation, then turn on the power.
a. Install a known good hard disk to see if the error persists. 7. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
b. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
18.9 Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the 8. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
error persists, Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred.
11. Perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error persists, reinstall the 9. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
Initial Actions
Obtain the following information from the customer.
• Job mode (Copy/Scan/Print/Fax)
• Type of job
• Job settings on the UI.
• To reproduce the error for troubleshooting purposes, the following will be required:.
– For network jobs: a copy of the output report and the network configuration.
– For print jobs: the PRN file.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
3. Check the version of Controller ROM. If it is not the latest, download and update to the lat-
est software revision. (Refer to Software Version Upgrade GP 9.)
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
6. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
7. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
8. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
9. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
10. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
11. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
Procedure 116-328 L2 Cache Fail - A failure was detected in the Level 2 Cache built in the CPU.
WARNING
Initial Actions
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
The error occurs in most printers caused by a corrupt print file, wrong printer driver or a corrupt
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. printer driver. Disconnect the printer from the network or USB and switch off, then switch on the
machine, GP 4. The error desists, reconnect network and test. If the error persists, purge all
Perform the steps that follow:
print files from the print server and/or individual workstations and retest.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Disconnect and reconnect the ESS PWB and turn on the power. Procedure
a. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (SFP)
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
3. After installation of the ESS PWB, serial number mismatch will occur. Perform dC132 to
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
correct the serial number mismatch issue.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
4. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
Perform the steps that follow:
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530) 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
to “1” after completing the procedure. 2. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP).
5. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode. 3. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
6. Check the version of Controller ROM. If it is not the latest, download and update to the lat-
est software revision. (Refer to Software Version Upgrade GP 9.)
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
8. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
9. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
10. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
11. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
12. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
13. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
14. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
15. Check the connection between the ESS PWB and the customer network or USB-con-
nected workstation, then turn on the power.
16. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
17. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error per-
sists,
18. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
116-337 SNTP S/W Fail - Overall SNTP fatal error. Due to an error in software processing, sub-
sequent processes cannot be performed.
116-339 JBA No HD - When the JBA is started up, the HDD is not installed.
116-353 HDD Physical Fail - The HDD was not booted due to a physical HDD failure detected
on booting.
116-354 HDD Product Fail - The HDD was not started up due to a Product Code error detected
in the HDD on booting. It is possible that the HDD had been formatted by the M/C of a different
product.
116-356 HDD Format Fail - HDD was formatted but an incorrect HDD was connected or a HDD
error occurred.
116-713 Job divided by HDD Full - Collate operation was split when HDD Full occurred in Print
Service.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the HDD installation and verify the HDD and both harness connectors are fully
seated.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
3. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
4. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15, Special Boot Mode
5. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
7. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
8. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
12. Perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error persists, reinstall the Perform the steps that follow:
original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Disconnect and reconnect the hard disk harness.
3. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
4. Perform GP 15, JOB LOG CLEAR in the Special Booting Menu.
5. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
6. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
7. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
8. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
9. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation where the error occurred.
10. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
11. Perform GP 15, STORAGE DEVICE INITIALIZE MODE in the Special Boot Mode proce-
dure. If the error persists,
a. Install a known good hard disk to see if the error persists.
b. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the
error persists,
12. Perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error persists, reinstall the
original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
During a check of Read/Write at power on, System Cont detects (ESS-NVRAM with factory 116-393 AAA manager fatal error.
settings is installed) or (Illegal ESS-NVRAM data is occurring).
116-394 Abnormal authentication mode and accounting mode settings detected during AAA
Because data for initialization in ESS-ROM is written on ESS-NVRAM data when 116-334 is manager boot sequence.
detected, powering off and on after that causes System Fails (124-3xx) that indicate mis-
matches in various data between the three locations. Procedure
1. Reload the software, GP 4.
Procedure 2. Perform GP 15, How to Obtain the Log Files.
WARNING 3. Call Support for further instruction.
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Disconnect and reconnect the ESS PWB and turn on the power.
a. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
3. Switch off, then switch off the machine, GP 4, if error 116-334 occurs.
4. Enter diagnostics, GP 1.
5. Execute dC132, following the corrective actions for the relevant Fault Code(s).
a. Switch off the machine, GP 4. Disconnect and reconnect the NVRAM Board, then
switch on the machine. If the error persists,
b. Switch off the machine, GP 4. Install new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL
18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP), then switch on the machine.
c. If the 116-334 problem still persists, perform the following steps to resolve it.
6. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
7. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
8. Check the version of Controller ROM, if the version is not current,
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
9. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
10. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
11. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
12. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
13. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
14. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
15. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
16. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
116-346 A response such as system function recall error was detected. 116-349 An error occurred when calling the Pflite function using the SIF.
Initial Actions
1. Request the customer to ensure that the machine’s network port settings are correct.
2. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
3. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
6. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
7. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated.
8. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
Initial Actions
Obtain the following information from the customer.
• Job mode (Copy/Scan/Print/Fax)
• Type of job
• Job settings on the UI.
• To reproduce the error for troubleshooting purposes, the following will be required:.
– For network jobs: a copy of the output report and the network configuration.
– For print jobs: the PRN file.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off the machine, GP 4.
2. Disconnect and reconnect the ESS PWB and turn on the power.
a. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
3. Switch on the machine, GP 4.
4. After installation of the ESS PWB, SN mismatch will occur. perform dC132 to correct the
SN mismatch issue.
5. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
6. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
7. Check the version of Controller ROM.
1. An HDD access error was detected during job execution. 116-385 Fatal error related to IDC. Due to an error in software processing, subsequent pro-
2. Insufficient memory is detected during image log creation. cesses cannot be performed.
NOTE: Note the difference in timing, that although 016-231 is detected during power ON, Initial Actions
it is ‘detected during job execution’.
Obtain the following information from the customer.
Procedure • Job mode (Copy/Scan/Print/Fax)
WARNING • Type of job
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do • Job settings on the UI.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause • To reproduce the error for troubleshooting purposes, the following will be required:.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. – For network jobs: a copy of the output report and the network configuration.
Perform the steps that follow: – For print jobs: the PRN file.
1. Switch off, then switch on the power, GP 4.
2. Check dC125 Active Faults. If a new fault is listed, perform the relevant RAP. Procedure
3. Perform 116-330, 336, 337, 339, 353, 354, 356, 361, 388 HDD Fail RAP.
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
3. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
4. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
5. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
6. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
7. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
8. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
9. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
10. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
11. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error per-
sists,
12. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. If the error persists, verify the fax USB Cable is connected to the correct USB port, then 2. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade. If the error persists,
turn the power on. 3. Enter Diagnostic, GP 1.
3. Switch on the machine, GP 4. 4. Enter dC131. Make sure NVM values 700-165, 700-338 and 700-402 are correct. Change
the values as necessary.
5. Exit Diagnostic, GP 1.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Expand the memory or install the HDD if it is not installed.
2. If the error persists, perform GP 37, How to Obtain the Log Files.
3. Contact Support for further instruction.
116-706 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-707 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-708 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-709 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-716 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
116-717 The MediaLib detected this error while performing the operation that requires access
to media.
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advice the customer check the contents in the media for errors from the PC:
a. Check the file format/directory and selected mode (digital camera print/document
print).
b. Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed.
c. Check whether the print file images are displayed.
d. Check whether the printed file attribute information is displayed.
e. If the error persists, inform the customer that the media may be defective.
2. If the error persists, inform the customer that the media may be defective.
Procedure Procedure
Perform the steps that follow: Some of the parameters are disabled by XPIF so the device cannot execute them. Advice the
1. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade. customer cancel the disabled parameter(s).
017-726 Color, single sided print attempted. Output changed to monochrome, duplex.
Procedure
Advice the customer to set the permissions as required.
Procedure Procedure
Rerun the job. If the error persists, delete unnecessary documents saved in the device and run Advice the customer select paper that has the same size and orientation as the registered
the job again. form.
017-741 The form data cannot be registered due to the restriction on the no. of forms. Procedure
Advice the customer upgrade the driver.
017-742 The logo data cannot be registered due to the restriction on the no. of logos.
017-743 The received data (form/logo) exceeded the registered buffer size.
Procedure
After checking the registered forms/logos using the Operation Panel utility, Advice the cus-
tomer delete any unnecessary forms or logos.
Procedure
Advice the customer repeat the operation.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Advice the customer:
a. Re-run the job.
b. Print to a machine that supports the printing instructions.
2. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
3. Change any possible mechanical settings for corrective actions or detection conditions
and repeat the operation.
4. Check the version of Controller ROM. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
5. Ask the customer for the procedures to reproduce the error.
a. Check the exact occurrence timing during job execution.
b. Check the job settings from the Panel.
c. Collect other information as much as possible to reproduce the error.
6. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain the Log Files immediately after the error has occurred
without powering down and powering the machine back up.
7. Contact Technical Support for further instructions.
Procedure Procedure
Advice the customer add the necessary font, or specify a substitute font. Perform the steps that follow:
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
3. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
4. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
6. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
7. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
8. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
9. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
10. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
11. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
12. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error per-
sists,
13. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off the machine, wait until the UI is fully off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
3. Contact Support for further instruction.
117-335 Invalid NVM of Convert Fail detected at startup after the power is cut off during the 117-348 Uninitialize used eMMC An uninitialized eMMC PWB that was used for another
NVM Map convert. device was recognized.
NOTE: After performing GP 15 Special Boot Modes it may be necessary to perform dC132
Device ID / Billing Data to verify all Device IDs are same.
Initial Actions
Obtain the following information from the customer.
• When the Image Log function is disabled and the Auto Transfer function is enabled, Trans-
fer in Job Units is set.
• When the Job Log Auto Transfer function is disabled and the Auto Transfer function of the
log is set to enabled.
• Job settings on the UI.
• To reproduce the error for troubleshooting purposes, the following will be required:.
– For network jobs: a copy of the output report and the network configuration.
– For print jobs: the PRN file.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Change the setting of Log Transfer function.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. For detection condition 1, change the operation method for Log Auto Transfer to anything
other than (Transfer in Job Units).
3. For detection condition 2, change the Auto Transfer function of the log to disable it.
4. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
5. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
6. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
8. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
9. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
10. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
11. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
12. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
13. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
14. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error per-
sists,
Procedure Procedure
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. WARNING
2. For Public Print, check whether it is set to be stored as Charge Print. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
3. Perform the 2.6 Log procedure not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
2. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
3. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
4. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
5. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
6. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
7. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
8. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
9. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
10. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
11. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
12. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error per-
sists,
13. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
117-356 During Job estimate acquisition, an error occurs. • TPM device could not be recognized.
• TPM self-diagnostic failed.
117-358 Fatal error of JAL relationship in software processing.
• Communications failure with TPM.
• TPM initialization failure.
Procedure
• The key generated by the TPM was used, but the TPM can no longer be used.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. For a single occurrence, take no action.
2. If the error persists, perform the steps that follow:
a. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
b. Unplug the Power cord from the machine for 2 mins. to ensure the UI Panel is off.
c. Ensure that all connectors on the MCU PWB and the ESS PWB are securely con-
nected. Make sure all surface mounted modules on both PWBs are securely con-
nected.
d. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
e. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL
18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Change the setting of Log Transfer function.
1. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. For detection condition 1, change the operation method for Log Auto Transfer to anything
other than (Transfer in Job Units).
3. For detection condition 2, change the Auto Transfer function of the log to disable it.
4. Perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
to “1” after completing the procedure.
5. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
Refer to GP 15 Special Boot Mode.
6. Check the version of Controller ROM.
a. Perform GP 9, Software Version Upgrade.
7. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
8. If the error persists after performing, GP 4, perform GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
9. Switch off the machine, GP 4, disconnect the power cord for 2 minutes.
10. Switch on the machine, GP 4, perform the same operation causing the error.
11. Verify the wire harness connections on each PWB are fully seated properly, then perform
the same operation creating the error.
12. Switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4.
13. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and per-
form GP 37, How to Obtain Log Files.
14. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP) or PL 18.5 Item 5 (MFP Tall) or PL 18.9
Item 5 (SFP) and perform the same operation where the error occurred. If the error per-
sists,
15. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact Support for instructions.
123-312 The data received from the controller has exceeded the upper limit of the processing
123-384 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
capability in the UI.
123-389 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-325 The specified UI internal object could not be created due to a setting/specification
error. UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-390 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-326 The memory in the GUAM exceeded the upper limit.
123-392 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-333 The H/W connection in the UI is faulty or the internal connection could not be correctly 123-393 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
detected.
123-395 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-343 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-396 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-344 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-397 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-350 MCW panel one-touch key fail.
123-398 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-352 An error internal to the con-panel (an abnormal value in EEPROM for Sys) has been
detected.
123-399 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB.
123-353 The control panel has detected that the UI cable is disconnected.
WARNING
123-354 The control panel has detected a drop in +24VDC power voltage. Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
123-355 The control panel has detected a drop in +5VDC power voltage. or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure
123-357 The control panel has detected that writing in the EEPROM has failed. Perform the steps that follow:
1. Make sure that the UI Cable connection section of the UI are installed properly and per-
123-358 The control panel has detected that writing in the EEPROM for logging failed.
form the same operation where the error occurred.
123-362 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB. • perform the following procedures:
2. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
123-368 There is insufficient memory or the connection failed. • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
123-369 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB. to “1” after completing the procedure.
3. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu.
123-371 The parameter sent from the controller was incorrect.
GP 15 Special Boot Modes.
4. Check the version of Controller ROM. If it is not the latest, download and update to the lat-
123-374 The job ID parameter sent from the controller was incorrect.
est software revision. Refer to Software Version Upgrade GP 9.
123-377 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB. 5. Switch the power Off and On, GP 4.
6.If the error persists after turning the power off and on GP 4, Obtain the log file using the
123-379 UI-SW failure in the ESS PWB. log tool GP 37.
124-317: DC132 04 At least one Product a/f Model identification information value held in three Possible Parts Affected:
locations was different.
• MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP)
• ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP)
124-355: DC132 14 At least one set of territory information at the 3 locations is different.
Procedure
Possible Parts Affected: WARNING
• MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP) Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
• ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
Procedure or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
2. Enter dC131 NVM Read/Write, compare the following 3 NVM values. and verify the 3
need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. numbers match.
Procedure Procedure
WARNING WARNING
Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow: Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4. 1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) 2. Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP)
are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules are securely connected. are securely connected. Make sure all surface mounted modules are securely connected.
3. Refer to Software Version Upgrade GP 9. 3. Refer to Software Version Upgrade GP 9.
4. If the fault persists, Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP). 4. If the fault persists, Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP)
124-335 The installation of the font ROM was not detected. Procedure
124-337 An error was detected in the ESS built-in standard RAM.
WARNING
Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
Procedure need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING Perform the steps that follow:
Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4,
need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 2. If the fault persists, Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP).
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Install the latest software version, GP 9.
124-351: CRUM OEM Fail MCU One of the CRUM destinations stored in three positions does
124-343 CRUM Market Fail SYS 2
not match (Data stored in the MCU PWB does not match).
124-352 CRUM OEM Fail SYS 1
124-361: CRUM Validation Fail MCU One of the CRUM destinations stored in three positions
does not match (Data stored in the MCU PWB does not match).
124-353 CRUM OEM Fail SYS 2
124-381: CRUM MarketFail MCU (2) destinations stored in three positions does not match
124-362 CRUM Validation Fail SYS 1
(Data stored in the MCU PWB does not match).
124-363 CRUM Validation Fail SYS 2
124-391: CRUM OEM Fail MCU (2) destinations stored in three positions does not match
(Data stored in the MCU PWB does not match).
124-382 CRUM Market Fail SYS 1 (2)
124-346: All Billing CountTypes Mismatch All the billing count types kept at multiple loca- Possible Parts Affected:
tions are different.
• MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP). PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP)
124-348: All Modal Break Points Mismatch All the Modal Break Points kept at multiple loca- • ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP)
tions are different. Procedure
WARNING
Possible Parts Affected: Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
• MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP) need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
• ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Procedure Perform the steps that follow:
WARNING 1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not 2. Enter diagnostic dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match.
need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death • 720-002
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. • 720-062
Perform the steps that follow: 3. Install a new MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP) execute diagnostic
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4. dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match.
2. Enter diagnostic dC132 Device ID/Billing Data. 4. Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) and execute diag-
nostic dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match
3. Install a new MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP) enter dC132 Device
ID/Billing Data.
4. Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) enter dC132 Device
ID/Billing Data.
WARNING Procedure
Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not WARNING
need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
Perform the steps that follow: or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4. Perform the steps that follow:
2. Enter diagnostic dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match. 1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
• 720-052 2. Enter diagnostic dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match.
• 720-063 • 720-057
3. Install a new MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP) execute diagnostic • 720-064
dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match. 3. Install a new MCU PWB PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP) PL 18.9 Item 1 (SFP) execute diagnostic
4. Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) and execute diag- dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match.
nostic dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match. 4. Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) and execute diag-
nostic dC131 NVM Read/Write, and verify the 2 numbers match.
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do not
need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause death
or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
2. Enter diagnostic dC131 NVM Read/Write.
3. Install a new MCU PWB PL 18.1 (MFP) PL 18.9 (SFP).
127-342 JobTemplate Monitor Fail - A problem has occurred with software processing, caus- 127-399 JME Soft Fatal Error - Fatal error related to JME.
ing the processing to stop.
Procedure
Initial Actions WARNING
Obtain the following information from the customer. Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
• Job mode (Copy/Scan/Print/Fax) not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
• Type of job
Perform the steps that follow:
• Job settings on the UI.
1. Switch off then switch on the machine, GP 4.
• To reproduce the error for troubleshooting purposes, the following will be required:.
2. Check the version of Controller ROM.
– For network jobs: a copy of the output report and the network configuration.
a. Verify the machine software version is the latest revision, download and install the
– For print jobs: the PRN file.
latest software if it is not. Refer to GP 9 Software Version Upgrade.
3. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
Procedure • If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
WARNING log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530)
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do to “1” after completing the procedure.
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause 4. Check the connection between the ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. (SFP) and the customer network or USB-connected workstation, then turn on the power.
Perform the steps that follow: 5. Check use the ping command to check for faulty ports listed in Table 1 that may be in
1. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. error:
• If there was a reboot after the error had occurred and hence was unable to obtain the
log, set NVM (700-530) to “0” to perform log collection and return the NVM (700-530) Table 1 Ports and Ping Commands
to “1” after completing the procedure. SNTP SMB lpd USB Salutation IO
2. Perform Hardware Diagnostic using the LONGDIAG MODE in the Special Booting Menu. NetWare Port 9100 FTP Serv IPP MailIO
GP 15 Special Boot Modes.
3. Check the version of Controller ROM. If it is not the latest, download and update to the lat- 6. If the error persists, perform the same operation that created the error originally and
est software revision. Refer to Software Version Upgrade GP 9. Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37.
4. Switch the power Off and On, GP 4, if the error persists after turning the power off and on a. Proceed with the following to collect the data recorded in each item.
GP 4, Obtain the log file using the log tool GP 37. • 2.4.2 (Not connected to network) or (Unable to find the device from the PC)
5. Turn off the Power GP 4, unplug the power cord for 2 minutes, then turn on the Power • 2.4.3 No output is available, no data is printed
again GP 4 to perform the same operation where the error occurred. 7. Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) and perform the
6. Verify the wire harness connections on each board are installed properly, then perform same operation where the error occurred.
the same operation creating the error.
8. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact the Support Department for instructions.
7. Install a new ESS PWB PL 18.1 Item 5 (MFP), PL 18.9 Item 5 (SFP) and perform the
same operation where the error occurred, the error persists.
8. Reinstall the original ESS PWB and contact the Support Department for instructions.
133-220 Due to an error during FAX controller software processing, subsequent processes
cannot be performed.
133-221 The FAX card did not respond within the specified time on booting.
133-222 The FAX card did not respond within the specified time.
133-224 Version mismatch between the controller ROM and the FAX card ROM.
133-226 The code that does not provide FAX service is set in the system data country code.
133-701 Character replacement has occurred in destination name, sender name, comment,
station name.
Initial Actions
Get the procedures for reproducing an error according to the operation that was performed
when the error occurred.
1. Check the job type: Send Mail, Receive Mail, Broadcast Send, Polling, or Folder Receipt.
2. Check the job settings from the Panel.
3. Check whether it is Speed Dial or Keypad Dial.
4. Check which function was used: G3 or G4.
• Collect other procedures as much as possible to reproduce the error.
3. Check the line (telephone line, TA, etc.) for possible cause of noise.
4. Check the ground connection.
5. The Fax Job Fail occurs due to the remote machine’s environment and the line status.
NOTE: If the Fail is occurring with a specific recipient, it is largely caused by the recipi-
ent’s environment, and hence any adjustment at the device could result in it affecting the
other communications,
6. Verify the FAX PWB PL 18.1 Item 9 and Fax Harness Assy PL 18.1 Item 10 connections
are seated fully.
7. Obtain the Fax-related reports (Protocol Monitor, Activity Report, Configuration Report,
Scan / Fax Configuration, and Job History Report).
• Depending on the situation, such as in the cases of Broadcast Send or Folder
Receipt, obtain the Speed Dial list or Stored Document list.
8. The Fax JobFail occurs due to the remote machines and line status.
a. Check the remote machine, line status, and then repeat the operation.
9. If the error occurs frequently, take notes on the exact occurrence timings during job exe-
cution.
10. Before turning the power off and on GP 4, obtain logs immediately, GP 37, after the error
has occurred.
11. Install a new FAX PWB REP 18.4 and perform the operation again.
12. Reinstall the original FAX PWB and contact the Support for instructions.
1. DC900G: Procedure
a. Fusing Unit: Shifted to Warming Up and Sagging occurred. The CC Cleaner Position Load the required number and/or size of documents, then re-run the routine.
was moved from the Home Position
b. Fusing Unit Relay State: Shifted to Not Ready.
c. Drum Cycle State: Shifted to Cleaning Request.
d. CC Wire Warning: Occurred.
e. Reserve Tank State: Filling.
f. Drum CRUM State: Unknown.
2. DCC5540G/DC540G:
a. Fusing Unit: Shifted to Warming Up and Sagging occurred.
b. Reserve Tank State: Filling.
Procedure
Allow the machine to return from the wait state, then re-run the routine.
Procedure
Re-run the routine.
NOTE: Due to the intermittent nature of unusual noises, this RAP can only give guidance on Procedure
how to isolate noises. This RAP will not find all possible causes. When machines become old
Perform the steps that follow:
and worn, unusual noises may arise that are not covered in this RAP.
1. Check that the power cord is pugged into the proper power source and there is no dam-
Procedure age to the power cord. If the power cord is damaged or no power to the machine, install a
new power cord PL 18.3 (MFP), PL 18.11 (SFP). If the UI console has no display proceed
WARNING to step 2.
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
2. Install a new LVPS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 16 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 16 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
Item 16 (SFP). If the UI console has no display proceed to step 3.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
3. Install a new UI console assembly, PL 1.1 Item 1 (MFP and MFP Tall), PL 1.2 Item 1
1. Request the customer to demonstrate the function that generates the unusual noise. (SFP). If the UI console has no display proceed to step 4.
2. Cycle system power. Wait while the printer performs a normal initialization and warm-up. 4. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 1 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 1
3. Run the machine in all modes, GP 15, Special Boot Modes. (SFP). If the UI console has no display proceed to step 5.
Noise when Switching on the Machine 5. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 3 (MFP), PL 18.5 Item 3 (MFP Tall), PL 18.9 Item 3
CAUTION (SFP). If the UI console has no display proceed to step 6.
Do not run the dispenser motor, PL 5.1 Item 1 for more than 3 seconds at any speed as dam- 6. Contact Support for further instruction.
age may occur.
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the operation of the dispenser motor. Enter dC330 code 093-004 (Y), 093-005 (M),
093-006 (C), 093-007 (K) and run the dispenser motor. If the noise persists, install a new
toner cartridge, PL 5.1.
2. Check the operation of the main drive assembly. Enter dC330 code 071-061 and run the
main drive assembly. If the noise persists, install a new main drive assembly, PL 3.1 Item
1 (High), PL 3.1 Item 2 (Low).
3. If the noise persists, contact Support for further instruction.
During Standby
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Check the operation of the main fan, PL 4.1 Item 1. Enter dC330 code 042-001 and run
the main fan. If the noise persists, install a new main fan, PL 4.1 Item 1.
During Printing
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Install a new MSI feed solenoid,PL 13.1 Item 7.
2. If the noise persists, install a new registration clutch, PL 15.1 Item 8.
3. If the noise persists, refer to the procedure above, Noise when Switching on the Machine.
During DADF Feeding
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Clean the separation pad, PL 50.1 Item 7. If the noise persists, install a new separation
pad, PL 50.1 Item 7.
2. If the noise persists, install a new DADF assembly, PL 50.1 Item 1.
Number
LED7
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0
Normal LongBoot Related Fail
Fault Condition Diagnosis Diagnosis Code
1 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Initial status at power-on Yes Yes -
2 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On After CA7 L1 Boot has completed, SPI initialization Yes Yes -
3 Off Off Off Off Off Off On Off Before jumping to CA7 L2 Boot Stage 2 Yes Yes -
4 Off Off Off Off Off Off On On After jumping to CA7 L2 Boot Stage 2, after initialization during SPI Yes Yes -
5 Off Off Off Off Off On Off Off After DDR initialization has completed Yes Yes -
6 Off Off Off Off Off On Off On obs Yes Yes -
7 Off Off Off Off Off On On Off obs Yes Yes -
8 Off Off Off Off Off On On On obs Yes Yes -
9 Off Off Off Off On Off Off Off Before loading CA7 Boot Loader Yes Yes -
10 Off Off Off Off On Off Off On Failed to load/jump to CA7 Boot Loader Yes Yes -
11 Off Off Off Off On Off On Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
12 Off Off Off On Off Off Off Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
13 Off Off Off On Off Off Off On SPI module initialization has completed Yes Yes -
14 Off Off Off On Off Off On Off I2C module initialization has completed Yes Yes -
15 Off Off Off On Off Off On On Interrupt controller initialization has completed Yes Yes -
16 Off Off Off On Off On Off Off Debug serial initialization has completed Yes Yes -
17 Off Off Off On Off On Off On RTC Device initialization has completed Yes Yes -
18 Off Off Off On Off On On Off FCSPI module initialization has completed Yes Yes -
19 Off Off Off On Off On On On SD Card Power ON has completed Yes Yes -
20 Off Off Off On On Off Off Off Hard Disk Power ON has completed - - -
21 Off Off Off On On Off Off On CIP UI module initialization has completed Yes Yes -
22 Off Off Off On On Off On Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
23 Off Off Off On On Off On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
24 Off Off Off On On On Off Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
25 Off Off Off On On On Off On Reserved (OFF) - - -
26 Off Off Off On On On On Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
27 Off Off Off On On On On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
28 Off Off On Off Off Off Off Off Software initialization process has started Yes Yes -
29 Off Off On Off Off Off Off On Interrupt registration table initialization has completed Yes Yes -
30 Off Off On Off Off Off On Off Interrupt vector copying and enabling has completed Yes Yes -
31 Off Off On Off Off Off On On Mac Address has been obtained and stored Yes Yes -
32 Off Off On Off Off On Off Off Diag table initialization has completed Yes Yes -
33 Off Off On Off Off On Off On Memory area variable setting has completed Yes Yes -
34 Off Off On Off Off On On Off Memory area variable notification process has completed Yes Yes -
35 Off Off On Off Off On On On Command table initialization has completed Yes Yes -
36 Off Off On Off On Off Off Off Global variable initialization has completed Yes Yes -
37 Off Off On Off On Off Off On Connection Error: Check PWBA-AIRI (eMMC daughter board) Yes Yes -
38 Off Off On Off On Off On Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
LED7
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0
Normal LongBoot Related Fail
Fault Condition Diagnosis Diagnosis Code
39 Off Off On Off On Off On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
40 Off Off On Off On On Off Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
41 Off Off On Off On On Off On Reserved (OFF) - - -
42 Off Off On Off On On On Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
43 Off Off On Off On On On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
44 Off Off On On Off Off Off Off JUMP to Mini OS section Yes Yes -
45 Off Off On On Off Off Off On JUMP to Panbug Main section - - -
46 On On On On On On On On Flashes 0xFF ->0x00 repeatedly and alternately. Yes Yes -
Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off DDR initialization process has failed
47 On On On On Off Off Off Off Flashes 0xF0 and 0x0F repeatedly and alternately. Yes Yes -
Off Off Off Off On On On On Error: Checksum Error of the bootloader image
loaded to the memory from FCSPI ROM.
48 On Off On Off Off Off Off Off CA15-0: (0xA0 -> 0x05) is repeating alternately. Yes Yes -
Off Off Off Off Off On Off On CPLD is showing an invalid boot mode.
49 Flashing Flashes right to left, left to right repeatedly. Yes Yes -
Indicates PWBA Hardware Configuration is incorrect or not set.
50 Off Off On On Off On Off Off CA15-0:After the recovery from Switch OFF mode is detected - - -
by CPLD flag, before proceeding to read the NVM recovery data.
51 Off Off On On Off On Off On CA15-0: After reading the NVM recovery data, before - - -
calculating the checksum on the DDR.
52 Off Off On On Off On On On CA15-0: Immediately before jumping to the - - -
Switch OFF recovery point.
53 On On Off Off Off Off Off Off CA15-0: (0xC0 -> 0x03) is repeating alternately. Yes Yes -
Off Off Off Off Off Off On On Checksum Error during recovery from Switch OFF mode.
54 Off Off On On Off Off On On CA15-0: After the recovery from CPU OFF mode is detected - - -
by CPLD flag, before proceeding to read the NVM recovery data.
55 Off Off On On Off On On Off CA15-0: After reading the NVM recovery data, before - - -
calculating the checksum on the DDR.
56 Off Off On On On Off Off Off obs - - -
57 Off Off On On On Off Off On obs - - -
58 Off Off On On On Off On Off obs - - -
59 Off Off On On On Off On On CA15-0: Immediately before jumping to the CPU OFF recovery point. - - -
60 On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off 0x80 -> 0x01 is repeating alternately. - - -
Off Off Off Off Off Off Off On Stored data checksum Error during recovery from CPU OFF mode.
61 On On On Off Off Off Off Off 0xE0 -> 0x07 is repeating alternately. - - -
Off Off Off Off Off On On On Other Error has occurred at CA15, L2 Boot.
62 On On Off On Off Off Off Off SD module initialization has started Yes Yes 117-319
63 On On Off On Off Off Off On SD Card Power ON has completed Yes Yes 117-319
64 On On Off On Off Off On Off SD module initialization has completed Yes Yes 117-319
65 On On Off On Off Off On On SD Card driver error Yes Yes 117-319
66 On On Off On Off On Off Off An unsupported SD Card is inserted Yes Yes 117-321
Number
LED7
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0
Normal LongBoot Related Fail
Fault Condition Diagnosis Diagnosis Code
67 On On Off On Off On Off On SD Card is not inserted (not detected) Yes Yes 117-329
68 On On Off On Off On On Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
69 On On Off On Off On On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
70 On On Off On On Off Off Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
71 On On Off On On Off Off On Reserved (OFF) - - -
72 On On Off On On Off On Off SD module initialization has completed Yes Yes 117-319
73 On On Off On On Off On On Read process from SD Card has started Yes Yes 117-319
74 On On Off On On On Off Off SD module initialization check has completed Yes Yes 117-319
75 On On Off On On On Off On A15 Program memory expansion has completed Yes Yes 117-319
76 On On Off On On On On Off A7 Program memory expansion has completed Yes Yes -
77 On On Off On On On On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
78 On On Off Off Off Off Off On BackPlane Disconnect Detection Yes Yes 16-327
79 On On Off Off Off Off On Off UI cable Disconnect Detection Yes Yes 16-326
80 On On Off Off Off Off On On MCU Harness Disconnect Detection Yes Yes 16-328
81 On On Off Off Off On Off Off Detects the connection of a unknown PCI Option device. Yes Yes 117-336
82 On On Off Off Off On Off On Detects the connection of a unknown PCI EX Option device. Yes Yes 117-337
83 On On Off Off Off On On Off SD Card Insertion Detection Yes Yes 117-338
84 Off On Off Off Off Off Off Off IO ASIC diagnostic has started Yes Yes 016-355
85 Off On Off Off Off Off Off On IO ASIC diagnostic has completed - - -
86 Off On Off Off Off Off On Off Codec ASIC diagnostic has started Yes Yes 016-356
87 Off On Off Off Off Off On On Codec ASIC diagnostic has completed - - -
88 Off On Off Off Off On Off Off Standard FontROM diagnostic has started - - 116-380
89 Off On Off Off Off On Off On Standard FontROM diagnostic has completed - - -
90 Off On Off Off Off On On Off Extension FontROM diagnostic has started - - 116-380
116-310
116-317
91 Off On Off Off Off On On On Extension FontROM diagnostic has completed - - -
92 Off On Off Off On Off Off Off SEEP diagnostic has started Yes Yes 16-351
16-350
93 Off On Off Off On Off Off On SEEP diagnostic has completed - - -
94 Off On Off Off On Off On Off Timer diagnostic has started Yes Yes 16-343
95 Off On Off Off On Off On On Timer diagnostic has completed - - -
96 Off On Off Off On On Off Off PageMemory diagnostic has started - Yes 16-317
97 Off On Off Off On On Off On PageMemory diagnostic has completed - - -
98 Off On Off Off On On On Off IITIF diagnostic has started - - 16-319
16-329
16-333
16-334
16-348
99 Off On Off Off On On On On IITIF diagnostic has completed - - -
LED7
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0
Normal LongBoot Related Fail
Fault Condition Diagnosis Diagnosis Code
100 Off On Off On Off Off Off Off OS communication diagnostic has started - Yes 16-383
101 Off On Off Off Off Off Off On OS communication diagnostic has completed - - -
102 Off On Off On Off Off On Off RTC diagnostic has started - Yes 16-342
103 Off On Off On Off Off On On RTC diagnostic has completed - - -
104 Off On Off On Off On Off Off UI Check diagnostic has started - Yes 16-362
105 Off On Off On Off On Off On UI Check diagnostic has completed - - -
106 Off On Off On Off On On Off Lyra diagnostic has started - - -
107 Off On Off On Off On On On Lyra diagnostic has completed - - -
108 Off On Off On On Off Off Off USB 1.0 Host diagnostic has started - - 16-371
109 Off On Off On On Off Off On USB 1.0 Host diagnostic has completed - - -
110 Off On Off On On Off On Off USB 2.0 Host diagnostic has started - Yes 16-364
111 Off On Off On On Off On On USB 2.0 Host diagnostic has completed - - -
112 Off On Off On On On Off Off USB 2.0 Device diagnostic has started - Yes 16-365
113 Off On Off On On On Off On USB 2.0 Device diagnostic has completed - - -
114 Off On Off On On On On Off HDD diagnostic has started - Yes 16-366
16-367
115 Off On Off On On On On On HDD diagnostic has completed - - -
116 Off On On Off Off Off Off Off HDD (UFS) diagnostic has started - Yes 16-372
117 Off On On Off Off Off Off On HDD (UFS) diagnostic has completed - - -
118 Off On On Off Off Off On Off Torino diagnostic has started - - 16-368
119 Off On On Off Off Off On On Torino diagnostic has completed - - -
120 Off On On Off Off On Off Off Selene diagnostic has started - Yes 16-369
121 Off On On Off Off On Off On Selene diagnostic has completed - - -
122 Off On On Off Off On On Off Ethernet diagnostic has started - Yes 16-349
123 Off On On Off Off On On On Ethernet diagnostic has completed - - -
124 Off On On Off On Off Off Off SdCard diagnostic has started - Yes 117-324
117-320
117-321
117-323
125 Off On On Off On Off Off On SdCard diagnostic has completed - - -
126 Off On On Off On Off On Off IOT communication diagnostic has started - Yes 016-353
127 Off On On Off On Off On On IOT communication diagnostic has completed - - -
128 Off On On Off On On Off Off IIT communication diagnostic has started - Yes 016-354
129 Off On On Off On On Off On IIT communication diagnostic has completed - - -
130 Off On On Off On On On Off Standard ROM diagnostic has started - Yes 116-317
16-336
131 Off On On Off On On On On Standard ROM diagnostic has completed - - -
132 Off On On On Off Off Off Off EP accessory diagnostic has started - Yes 016-357
133 Off On On On Off Off Off On EP accessory diagnostic has completed - - -
Number
LED7
LED6
LED5
LED4
LED3
LED2
LED1
LED0
Normal LongBoot Related Fail
Fault Condition Diagnosis Diagnosis Code
134 Off On On On Off Off On Off Parallel diagnostic has started - Yes 016-358
135 Off On On On Off Off On On Parallel diagnostic has completed - - -
136 Off On On On Off On Off Off USBHUB diagnostic has started - Yes 016-359
137 Off On On On Off On Off On USBHUB diagnostic has completed - - -
138 Off On On On Off On On Off USB 3.0 Drv diagnostic has started - Yes 016-361
139 Off On On On Off On On On USB 3.0 Drv diagnostic has completed - - -
140 Off On On On On Off Off Off WIFI diagnostic has started - Yes 016-384
141 Off On On On On Off Off On WIFI diagnostic has completed - - -
142 Off On On On On Off On Off A4Fax diagnostic has started - Yes 016-346
143 Off On On On On Off On On A4Fax diagnostic has completed - - -
144 On Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Power Savor transition (Standby -> LowPower) Yes - -
145 On Off Off Off Off Off Off On Power Saving (LowPower) Yes - -
146 On Off Off Off Off Off On Off Power Saving (Sleep) Yes - -
147 On Off Off Off Off Off On On Power Savor transition (LowPower->Sleep) Yes - -
148 Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Off Power Saving (CpuOFF) Yes - -
149 On Off Off Off Off On Off Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
150 On Off Off Off Off On On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
151 On Off Off Off On Off Off On Power Savor transition (LowPower -> Standby) Yes - -
152 On Off Off Off On Off On Off Power Savor transition (Sleep -> Standby) Yes - -
153 On Off Off On Off Off Off Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
154 On Off Off On Off Off Off On Reserved (OFF) - - -
155 On Off Off On Off Off On Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
156 On Off Off On Off Off On On Reserved (OFF) - - -
157 On Off Off On Off On Off Off Reserved (OFF) - - -
158 On Off Off On Off On Off On Power Savor transition (CpuOff -> Sleep) Yes - -
159 On On On On On On On On VxWORKS boot complete Yes Yes -
Recovering from Power Savor
2. Ensure all connections to the printer are secure. • Vertical lines or bands
3. Check the CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life. • Stains on the page back
4. Switch on the switch off the system power GP 4. LED Print Head (LPH) unit image defects:
5. Make sure the printer is positioned to allow adequate airflow at all vents. Refer to GP 22, • Vertical white lines
Installation Space Requirements. Scanner image defects:
6. Make sure the printer’s interior is clean. • Skewed image
7. Check the tray guides. • Vertical line
8. Use the customer’s print job to check defect reoccurrence. If the defect persists, begin to After determining the defect type and possible source, match the defect with those listed in
isolate the defect by attempting to identify the component responsible using the Repeat- Table 1.
ing Patterns test print.
9. Check stored tray settings for media size and type. Go to the RAP listed to correct the defect.
10. Check image adjustment and print mode settings being used.
Image Defect Definitions
11. Check if defect occurs when printing or copying. Printing refers to using an electronic file
as input; copying refers to using a hardcopy original as input. If defect occurs when copy- Table 1 lists image defect definitions and the RAP(s) used to correct the defects.
ing, check if defect occurs from the platen or the DADF.
Table 1 Image defect definitions
Defects Associated with Specific Components Defect Definition Go To
To aid with defect diagnosis, listed below are defects associated with specific components. Banding The image appears blurred in the horizontal direction IQ12
Refer to dC612 for detailed information about test patterns. Bead Carry-Out Media has gritty texture. IQ6
Blank Prints Prints are completely blank. IQ3
Procedure
Check media condition. Load new, dry recommended paper, and print a test print. For a listing
of test prints and how to print them, refer to dC612. The image is too light.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Verify that the printer’s media type is set appropriately for the media being used, and print a
test print. The image is too light.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Install a new BTR roll assembly; PL 19.2 Item 11 (MFP), PL 19.4 Item 11 (MFP_Tall), PL 19.6
Item 11 (SFP).
Procedure
Remove the 2nd bias transfer roll (BTR) assembly. Check for surface contamination or exces-
sive wear, ensure the transfer roller is correctly seated. The transfer roller is good.
Y N
Install a new BTR roll assembly; PL 19.2 Item 11 (MFP), PL 19.4 Item 11 (MFP_Tall), PL
19.6 Item 11 (SFP).
Check the 2nd BTR plate spring on the HVPS, PL 18.2 Item 5. The plate spring is clean
and undamaged.
Y N
As necessary, clean the plate spring or install a new HVPS.
Remove the drum cartridge PL 8.1. Check the spring connectors on the HVPS, The spring
connectors are clean and undamaged.
Y N
As necessary, clean the spring connectors or install a new HVPS.
Enter dC330, code 093-001 to run the toner dispenser motor. The toner dispenser motor
runs.
Y N
• Check the toner dispenser motor PL 5.1 Item 1. Refer to GP 10; How to Check a
Motor.
• If necessary, install a new toner dispenser motor PL 5.1 Item 1.
Check the ATC sensor contact point on the drum cartridge, and the xerographic connector
assembly. The contact point is good.
Y N
Install new components as necessary:
• Xero deve CRU assembly (drum cartridge) (PL 18.1)
• Xerographic connector assembly
A
08/2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 3-5 IQ2, IQ3
A
Ensure that all connectors on the ESS PWB, PL 18.9 (SFP), PL 18.1 (MFP std.), PL 18.6 IQ4 Smeared/Unfused Image
(MFP_Tall) and the MCU PWB, are securely connected. Ensure all surface mounted modules
The printed image is not fully fused to the paper. The image rubs off easily. A cold environment
on the ESS PWB and MCU PWB are securely connected. The image quality defect per-
affects the warm-up time, while high humidity has an adverse effect on fusing. Also, media
sists.
Y N weight and composition affect fusing performance. Refer to Figure 1.
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Initial Actions
Install new components as necessary: WARNING
• Drum cartridge, PL 8.1 Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
• HVPS PWBA: PL 18.2 Item 2 (MFP Std.), PL 18.6 Item 2 (MFP_Tall), PL 18.10 Item 2 electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
(SFP). injury.
• LPH Head assembly mono, PL 2.1 Item 1. WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
After each action, print a test page to check if image quality improves.
• Check the environment. A location that’s too cold or humid reduces fusing performance
(refer to GP 27 Environmental Data.)
• Verify that the media type is set correctly. Refer to GP 26 for Media Specifications.
• Verify that the toner cartridge is genuine Xerox toner.
Procedure
Check the tray settings and install new, dry media from an unopened ream. Run a test print.
The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Increase fuser temperature, and re-run test print on good media. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions
Remove and inspect the fuser assembly and fuser electrical connections. Install a new fuser if
necessary. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
A
Image Quality 08/2017 Revised BUS Update: 9 July 2018
IQ3, IQ4 3-6 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
A
Install a new fuser PL 7.1 Item 1. IQ5 Random Spots
There are spots of toner randomly scattered on the page. Refer to Figure 1.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications.
• Clear the media path of items such as staples, paper clips or paper scraps.
• Check the drum cartridge surface for spots or contamination.
• Check that the drum cartridge contacts are clean.
Clean the LED Print Head ADJ 1.
Procedure
Print a test print. The image quality defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Remove the BTR roll assembly and check for surface contamination and wear. The roll is
worn or damaged.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Install a new BTR roll assembly; PL 19.2 Item 11 (MFP), PL 19.4 Item 11 (MFP_Tall), PL 19.6
Item 11 REP 19.22 (SFP). The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Check the drum cartridge for spots or contamination and re-run the test print. The defect per-
sists.
Procedure
Check the altitude setting if the printer is installed in a high altitude location. The altitude is
set for the appropriate value.
Y N
Go Service Tools on the Printer Maintenance tab to adjust the altitude value.
Reseat HVPS bias connections. If necessary, install a new HVPS PL 18.2 Item 2. The defect
persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
NOTE: If the drum cartridge was removed and placed in the light, reinstall it in the printer and
wait approximately 1 hour before printing a test sheet to see if this resolves the problem.
After each action, print a test page to check if image quality improves. Refer to the Repeating
Defects test print dC612.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications.
• Ensure that the toner cartridge is a genuine Xerox cartridge.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Procedure
Install a new drum cartridge PL 8.1, and re-run the test print. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Remove the BTR roll assembly and check for surface contamination and wear. If necessary,
install a new BTR roll assembly; PL 19.2 Item 11 (MFP), PL 19.4 Item 11 (MFP_Tall), PL 19.6
Item 11 (SFP). The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Check the fuser assembly for damage or debris and install a new one if necessary. The
defect persists.
Check the BTR plate spring, PL 18.2 Item 5. The plate spring is clean and undamaged.
Y N
As necessary, clean the plate spring or install a new HVPS, PL 18.2 Item 2 (MFP), PL
18.6 Item 2 (MFP_Tall), PL 18.10 Item 2, (SFP).
Remove the Drum Cartridge, PL 8.1. Check the BCR and DB spring connectors on the HVPS,
The spring connectors are clean and undamaged.
Y N
As necessary, clean the spring connectors or install a new HVPS, PL 18.2 Item 2 (MFP),
PL 18.6 Item 2 (MFP_Tall), PL 18.10 Item 2, (SFP)
Procedure
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
Print a test pattern. The image quality defect persists.
Y N
Clean the scanner (MFP) using the procedure described in ADJ 2. If the fault persists,
install a new IIT assembly, PL 50.1 Item 2.
Remove the BTR roll assembly, Check for surface contamination or excessive wear, ensure the
transfer roller is correctly seated. The transfer roller is good.
Install a new drum cartridge PL 8.1. Make a copy from the document glass. The image qual-
ity defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Install a new scanner assembly (MFP) PL 50.1 Item 2. Make a copy from the document glass.
The defect persists.
Figure 1 Cyclic dots Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Remove the fuser unit, PL 7.1 Item 1. Check the fuser roll for contamination. The fuser roll is
clean.
Y N
Clean the fuser roll. If necessary, install a new fuser assembly, PL 7.1 Item 1.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Ensure that the electricity to the machine is switched off while performing tasks that do
not need electricity. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
• Check that rollers and other media path components are clean and unobstructed.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life
• Ensure that a genuine Xerox toner cartridge is being used.
Procedure
Print the repeating defects test print dC612. Look only at the solid areas, not at the map area.
The defect persists
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Install a new drum cartridge, REP 8.1 and re-run the test print. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Inspect the LED array on the LPH for debris or contamination. If necessary, install a new LPH
ADJ 1, REP 2.1. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
A
Image Quality 08/2017 Revised BUS Update: 9 July 2018
IQ10 3-12 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
IQ11 Horizontal Banding IQ12 Banding (Blurred in horizontal direction)
The image has horizontal black bands across the output. See Figure 1. The image appears blurred in the horizontal direction. See Figure 1.
Procedure
Ensure that the drum cartridge is properly installed. Reinstall the drum cartridge if necessary.
The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Install a new drum cartridge, PL 8.1, REP 8.1. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions
Check that the connections on the HVPS PWBA are properly seated. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Replace the HVPS PWBA; PL 18.2 Item 2 (MFP), PL 18.6 Item 2 (MFP_Tall), PL 18.10 Item 2
Remove the fuser assembly. Turn the gear by hand and examine the heat roll section. If dam-
aged, install a new fuser PL 7.1. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Procedure
Discuss printing behavior with the customer. The customer is printing a lot of continuous
high-area coverage prints.
Y N
Install a new drum cartridge, PL 8.1, REP 8.1
Discuss printer limitations with the customer. Print the number of low coverage pages neces-
sary to recover the print job.
A
08/2017 Image Quality
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 3-15 IQ14, IQ15
A
Remove the fuser and check for damage, debris, and contamination. Install a new fuser IQ16 High Background on Prints
assembly if necessary PL 7.1, REP 7.1. The defect persists.
There is toner contamination on all or part of the page; refer to Figure 1. The contamination
Y N
appears as a very light dusting or fog on prints and copies.
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
NOTE: If the defect occurs when making copies or scanning documents, and not when printing
Contact Xerox Technical Support.
files, refer to the white reference calibration in dC945.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
After each action, print a test page to check if image quality improves.
• Check that the media type settings are correct.
• Some glossy media or photo paper will exhibit high background. If the issue only occurs
on a particular media, try a different brand.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications.
• Verify the toner cartridge is a Xerox manufactured part with adequate life remaining.
• Ensure covers are in place and no outside light enters the printer.
• Clean the LPH ADJ 1.
Procedure
Check the paper condition. Load new, dry recommended paper, and print a test print. The
image includes background defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Remove the drum cartridge, REP 8.1, clean the electrical contacts, then print a test print. The
image includes background defects.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
A
Image Quality 08/2017 Revised BUS Update: 9 July 2018
IQ15, IQ16 3-16 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
A
Install a new drum cartridge, PL 8.1, REP 8.1 and reprint the test print. The image includes IQ17 Jagged/ Blurry Text and Image
background defects.
Text in image is blurry or jagged along the edges. Refer to Figure 1.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Initial Actions
Check that the connections on the HVPS PWBA are properly seated. The defect persists. WARNING
Y N Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
Replace the HVPS PWBA; PL 18.2 Item 2 (MFP), PL 18.6 Item 2 (MFP_Tall), PL 18.10 Item 2
(SFP). WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
After each action, print a test page to check if image quality improves.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications.
• Check that the media type settings are correct.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
• Clean the LED Print Head (LPH).
Procedure
On the Printer Options tab, set Print Quality to Enhanced. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
If the customer is using a downloaded font, ensure that the font is recommended for the printer,
operating system, and the application being used. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Procedure
Check the location of wrinkles on the media. Wrinkles are about 30mm or more from the
four edges of an envelope.
Y N
This type of wrinkle is considered normal. The printer is not at fault. Perform SCP 6 Final
Actions.
Reload the envelopes in the bypass tray properly. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Replace the 2nd bias transfer roller (BTR roll assembly); PL 19.2 Item 11 REP 19.9 (MFP), PL
19.4 Item 11(MFP_Tall), PL 19.6 Item 11 REP 19.22 (SFP). Repeat the Repeating Defects test
print. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
A
Image Quality 08/2017 Revised BUS Update: 9 July 2018
IQ18 3-18 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
IQ19 Leading Edge Paper Damage IQ20 Incorrect Image Position or Margins
The page exits with the leading edge damaged. Refer to Figure 1. Image prints outside of the page margins. Refer to Figure 1.
• Inspect the paper path for items, such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps. • Make certain that settings are correct for; trays, paper guides and paper types.
• Make certain that settings are correct for; trays, paper guides and paper types. • Ensure that the toner cartridge is a genuine Xerox toner cartridge.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life. • Clean the LPH. (ADJ 1)
• Clean the LPH. Refer to ADJ 1.
Initial Actions
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
After each action, print a test page to check if image quality improves.
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications.
• Make certain that settings are correct for; trays, paper guides and paper types.
• Inspect the paper path for items, such as staples, paper clips, and paper scraps.
• Ensure that the toner cartridge is a genuine Xerox toner cartridge.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
Procedure
Adjust the paper guides to the proper position. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions
Check the paper feed path roller PL 13.1. The the paper feed path roller is good.
Y N
Clean or install a new transfer roller (BTR roll assembly); PL 19.2 Item 11 (MFP), PL 19.4
Item 11 (MFP_Tall), PL 19.6 Item 11 (SFP).
Check the installation status of the fuser assembly PL 7.1. The fuser assembly is installed
correctly.
Y N
Install the fuser correctly, PL 7.1.
Initial Actions NOTE: The test patterns are printable from the Reference Library for correct letter and A4
sizes.
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need Procedure
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause IOT Print Skew
injury.
WARNING 1. Print the test page, Figure 1.
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot. 2. Measure from the edge of the paper to the 10mm line at points 1 and 2, then 5 and 6.
After each action, print a test page to check if image quality improves. 3. The skew is the difference between the two measurements for that side.
• Clean the LED Print Head (LPH) ADJ 1. 4. Verify the difference is within the tolerance value as given in Table 1 for IOT (Internal
Print).
• Check that the paper is clean, dry, and meets specifications.
Copy Skew
• Remove items from the paper path, such as staples, paper clips or paper scraps.
• Check CRU life counts. Replace components at end of life.
1. Print one test page, Figure 1, mark the page side 1.
2. Measure from the edge of the paper to the 10mm line at points 1 and 2, then 5 and 6.
3. Copy the page, then mark the copy side 2.
4. Measure from the edge of the paper to the 10mm line at points 1 and 2, then 5 and 6.
5. Compare the side 1 and side 2 skew difference. Verify the difference is within the toler-
ance in Table 1.
Check that the LPH array is installed correctly. The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
Check that the FFC cables connecting the LPH array to the ESS PWB are installed correctly.
The defect persists.
Y N
Perform SCP 6 Final Actions.
NOTE: The test patterns are printable from the Reference Library for correct letter and A4
sizes.
Procedure
IOT Print Registration
The printable version of the letter and A4 size skew test pattern above is located here:
The printable version of the letter and A4 size registration test pattern above is located here:
Adjustments
ADJ 1 Cleaning the LPH ................................................................................................. 4-223
ADJ 2 Cleaning the Scanner........................................................................................... 4-226
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
1. Verify the software version, if possible, before and after replacement of the UI and update
the software, GP 9, if needed.
2. Remove the UI console assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove the UI access door (2) from the console, REP 1.5.
b. Release the UI and the speaker harness (3) from the UI console assembly.
c. Remove four screws (4) attaching the UI console assembly (5) to the UI frame
assembly.
d. Remove the UI console assembly (5) from the UI frame assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-5 REP 1.1
REP 1.2 UI Inner Cover (MFP) REP 1.3 UI Frame Cover (MFP)
Parts List on PL 1.1 Parts List on PL 1.1
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41. NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
1. Remove the left side IIT cover, REP 50.5. 1. Remove the IU inner cover, REP 1.2.
2. Release two hooks, and remove the UI inner cover, Figure 1. 2. Release four push ties (1) attaching the harnesses, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 1.2, REP 1.3 4-6 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
3. Remove three screws (2), then remove the UI frame inner cover (3), PL 1.1 Item 3. REP 1.4 UI Harness
Parts List on PL 1.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-7 REP 1.3, REP 1.4
REP 1.5 UI Access Door (MFP)
Parts List on PL 1.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
1. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (1) at the side of the UI access door (2) to slightly open the
UI access door, then remove the UI access door (3).
Figure 1 UI harness
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging harnesses during replacement. When attaching the UI console assembly to
the UI frame assembly, be sure to feed the harnesses completely back through the frame
before attaching the console to the frame.
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory- Figure 1 UI access door
installed routes.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 1.4, REP 1.5 4-8 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Replacement REP 1.6 UI Console Assembly (SFP)
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 1.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-9 REP 1.5, REP 1.6
Replacement REP 1.7 UI Inner Cover (SFP)
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 1.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 1.6, REP 1.7 4-10 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 1.8 UI Harness (SFP)
Parts List on PL 1.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-11 REP 1.8
REP 1.9 UI Access Door (SFP) Replacement
Parts List on PL 1.2 1. Align the access door with the opening and press the access door to lock closed.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
1. Insert a flat blade screwdriver (1) at the side of the UI access door (2), then remove the UI
access door (3).
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 1.9 4-12 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 2.1 LPH Mono Head Assembly
Parts List on PL 2.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the front cover assembly, REP 19.1.
2. Remove the CRU Xerographic Developer Assembly, REP 8.1.
CAUTION
Protect the drum from deterioration. When performing the following step, cover the drum with
paper or similar material to prevent exposure to direct sunlight or room light.
Avoid damaging the LED strip on the LPH head assembly. Handle the LPH head assembly
carefully.
3. Remove the LPH cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove the XERO CRU Developer Assembly, REP 8.1
b. Release the three hooks (1).
c. Remove the LPH cover (2).
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-13 REP 2.1
REP 2.2 LPH MONO Guide
Parts List on PL 2.1 Item 2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the Right LPH Holder, REP 2.3.
2. Remove the LPH FFC cable, Figure 1:
a. Release the two hooks (1), then remove the LPH ESD cover (2).
b. Release the LPH FCC cable (3) from the harness guide of the HVPS cover (4).
CAUTION
In the next step, check that the reinforcing plate does not get caught in hole A or it could
damage the FFC cable during the removal.
c. Pull the LPH FFC (3) cable through hole (A), then remove the LPH FFC cable (3).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 2.1, REP 2.2 4-14 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Replacement
Form the FFC cable, along the fold line as shown in Figure 2.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-15 REP 2.2
REP 2.3 Right LPH Holder 2. While working the LPH FFC cable through hole A, remove the right LPH holder, Figure 2.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove two LPH ferrite cores, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 2.3 4-16 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 2.4 Toner Guide
Parts List on PL 2.1
Initial Actions
Remove the XERO CRU Developer assembly, REP 8.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the toner guide, Figure 1:
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Remove the toner guide (2).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-17 REP 2.4
REP 2.5 LPH MONO FFC Guide
Parts List on PL 2.1
Initial Actions
Remove the Left Side Cover, REP TBD
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the lower ESS plate and HDD bracket, Figure 1:
a. Remove two screws (1), then the lower ESS plate (2).
b. Remove two screws (3), then the HDD bracket (4).
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 2.5 4-18 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
2. Remove the LPH MONO FFC guide, Figure 2: Replacement
CAUTION 1. Insert the FFC cable through the core and then bend the knob portion about 90 degrees,
Raise the lock lever only as shown. Do not force to high or the lever will be damaged. Figure 3.
a. Disconnect the connector, P/J1363 (1) of the LPH FFC cable (2).
b. Remove two LPH ferrite cores (2) from the LPH FCC cable (2).
c. Release the lock lever (3) as shown.
d. Remove the LPH MONO FFC guide (4).
2. Place the reinforcing sheet, blue, at the insertion opening of the connector and insert it
into the connector, Figure 4.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-19 REP 2.5
3. Push the FFC cable into the connector until a clicking sound is heard, Figure 5.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 2.5 4-20 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 3.1 Main Drive Assembly
Parts List on PL 3.1
Initial Actions
Remove the Fusing Assembly REP 7.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To avoid potentially serious problems, follow the procedure shown below and use caution
when removing and handling this part. Do not disassemble this part. If replacing, use genuine
Xerox parts.
1. Remove the following harness assemblies from the main duct fan and MCU guide har-
ness, Figure 1:
• MCU-HVPS-MV harness assembly.
• Turn around clutch/humidity-MV harness assembly.
• Sub fan-MV harness assembly.
2. Release the following harness assemblies from the main fan duct and MCU guide har-
ness, Figure 2:
• DC-MV fusing harness assembly.
• 110V fusing harness assembly.
• Registration-MV harness assembly.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-21 REP 3.1
Figure 3 Main duct fan and MCU guide harness
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 3.1 4-22 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
9-2 Remove the rear interlock guide harness assembly from the main drive assem-
bly.
7. Remove the items that follow, Figure 5: Figure 5 Rear interlock guide harness assembly removal
• Four screws (ST18).
• MCU plate. Replacement
CAUTION CAUTION
Do not damage the laser print head and cable. Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
8. Remove the items that follow, Figure 5: installed routes.
8-1 Seven screws (SM18). The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
8-2 Main drive assembly with the rear interlock guide harness assembly.
9. Perform the items that follow, Figure 5:
9-1 Release the hook.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-23 REP 3.1
REP 3.2 MSI Drive assembly
Parts List on PL 3.1
Initial Actions
Remove the Main Drive Assembly REP 3.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To avoid potentially serious problems, follow the procedure shown below and use caution
when removing and handling this part. Do not disassemble this part. If replacing, use genuine
Xerox parts.
1. Disconnect connector P/J146, Figure 1.
2. Release the MSI drive assembly harness from the harness guide, Figure 1.
3. Remove the items that follow, Figure 1:
3.1 Four screws.
3.2 MSI drive assembly
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 3.2 4-24 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 4.1 Main Fan
Parts List on PL 4.1
Initial Actions
Remove the left side cover; REP 19.14.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To avoid potentially serious problems, follow the procedure shown below and use caution
when removing and handling this part. Do not disassemble this part. If replacing, use genuine
Xerox parts.
1. Disconnect connector, P/J289, Figure 1.
2. Release the two hooks attaching the main fan to the main fan duct and remove the main
fan, Figure 1.
Replacement
NOTE: Note the orientation of the main fan, install it so that the label side faces inward.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-25 REP 4.1
REP 4.2 Sub Fan Replacement
Parts List on PL 4.1 NOTE: Note the orientation of the main fan, install it so that the label side faces inward.
Initial Actions
Remove the right side cover; REP 19.2.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To avoid potentially serious problems, follow the procedure shown below and use caution
when removing and handling this part. Do not disassemble this part. If replacing, use genuine
Xerox parts.
1. Disconnect connector, P/J294, Figure 1.
2. Release the two hooks attaching the main fan to the main fan duct and remove the main
fan, Figure 1.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 4.2 4-26 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 4.3 Foot and Foot Assembly Kit
Parts List on PL 4.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To prevent the printer from falling off the workbench in the following steps, position the printer
to overhang the edge of the workbench as little as possible.
1. Position the front of the printer to overhang the edge of the workbench.
2. Install the new front two feet, Figure 1.
3. Position the back of the printer to overhang the edge of the workbench.
4. Install a new rear bottom foot, Figure 2.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-27 REP 4.3
Figure 2 Install new rear bottom foot
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 4.3 4-28 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 5.1 Dispenser/Environmental-MV Drive Assemblies
Parts List on PL 5.1
Initial Actions
Remove the fusing assembly REP 7.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Disconnect connector P/J171, Figure 1.
2. Release the dispenser/en vir omental-MV and CRUM-MV harness assemblies, Figure 1.
3. Remove the items that follow, Figure 1:
3-1 One (ST20) and three (SM3) screws.
3-2 Top MONO frame.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-29 REP 5.1
REP 5.2 Toner CRUM Connector Assembly
Parts List on PL 5.1
Initial Actions
Remove one of the items that follow:
• Top cover assembly/right IIT inner cover/left IIT inner cover, REP 19.13, REP 19.8 (MFP)
• Top cover assembly, REP 19.35 (MFP-tall) and REP 19.50 (SFP)
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Release the CRUM-MV harness assembly from the harness guide, Figure 1.
2. Release the hook to release toner CRUM connector assembly, Figure 1.
3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
3-1 Release the CRUM-MV harness assembly from the CRUM toner connector
assembly.
3-2 Disconnect connector P/J116.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 5.1, REP 5.2 4-30 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 5.3 Dispenser/Environmental Motor Assembly
Parts List on PL 5.1
Initial Actions
Remove one of the items that follow:
• Top cover assembly/right IIT inner cover/left IIT inner cover, REP 19.13, REP 19.8 (MFP)
• Top cover assembly, REP 19.35 (MFP-tall) and REP 19.50 (SFP)
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Disconnect connector P/J122, Figure 1.
2. Remove one screw (ST20), Figure 1.
3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
3-1 Rotate the dispenser/environmental motor.
3-2 Remove the environmental motor.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-31 REP 5.2, REP 5.3
Figure 1 Dispenser/environmental motor
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 5.3 4-32 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 6.1 Humidity and Temperature Sensor
Parts List on PL 6.1
Initial Actions
Remove the duplex registration roller kit REP 15.2.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Disconnect connector P/J145, Figure 1.
2. Remove one screw (ST20) and the humidity and temperature sensor, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-33 REP 6.1
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 6.1 4-34 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 7.1 Fusing Assembly Replacement
Parts List on PL 7.1 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
Do not touch the fuser while it is hot.
1. Open the rear cover assembly, REP 19.18, MFP, MFP tall REP 19.25, SFP.
2. Remove the items that follow, Figure 1:
2-1 Lift up the tabs.
2-2 Left the fusing assembly out of the frame as shown.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-35 REP 7.1
REP 7.2 Nip Retract Shaft Assembly
Parts List on PL 7.1
Initial Actions
Remove the exit chute assembly, REP 17.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the items that follow, Figure 1.
1-1 One screw (ST18).
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 7.2 4-36 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-37 REP 7.2
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 7.2 4-38 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 8.1 CRU Xerographic Developer Assembly
Parts List on PL 8.1
Initial Actions
Remove the MSI main tray assembly, REP 13.6
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the front cover assembly, Figure 1.
2. Remove the toner cartridge, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-39 REP 8.1
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 8.1 4-40 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 9.1 IOT 550 Feed Tray Assembly Replacement
Parts List on PL 9.1 NOTE: If this is a new feed tray, be sure the energy star label is installed on the tray.
Removal The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To avoid potentially serious problems, follow the procedure shown below and use caution
when removing and handling this part. Do not disassemble this part. If replacing, use genuine
Xerox parts.
1. Remove the feed tray assembly from the printer, Figure 1.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-41 REP 9.1
REP 9.2 CST Separator Holder Assembly
Parts List on PL 9.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 feed tray assembly, REP 9.1.
2. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
2-1 Release the hook.
2-2 Turn up and remove the CST separator holder assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 9.2 4-42 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 9.3 Tray Dust Cover
Parts List on PL 9.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Pull out the 550 cassette assembly, Figure 1.
2. Release the latches that hold the legal paper tray dust cover to the cassette, and remove
the cover, Figure 1.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-43 REP 9.3
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 9.3 4-44 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 10.1 550 Option Feeder Separation
Parts List on PL 10.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Slide the lever and release the two hooks attaching the 550 option feeder assembly, Fig-
ure 1.
WARNING
Do not attempt to remove or lift the following component with less than 2 people. The
component is very heavy and requires at least 2 people to lift or remove it. Any attempt
to remove or lift the component with less than 2 people could result in serious personal
injury.
2. Hold the recessed areas on both sides and raise the printer to separate it from the 550
option feeder assembly, Figure 1. Refer to GP 7 for machine configurations.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-45 REP 10.1
REP 10.2 550 Optional Feeder Foot
Parts List on PL 10.1
Initial Action
Do the removals that follow:
Replacement
The replacement if the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 10.2 4-46 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 10.3 Option Feeder Size Switch Assembly
Parts List on PL 10.1
Initial Actions
Remove the 550 option feeder assembly from the printer, REP 10.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
In the following step, avoid tearing off the LED harness assembly by gently pulling off the
option feeder left front cover.
1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
1-1 Press the hook to release the left front optional feed cover.
1-2 Remove the left front optional feed cover.
2. Disconnect connector P/J814 from the left front cover, Figure 1.
3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
3-1 Release the hook.
3-2 Remove the LED shade tree PWB.
4. Remove one screw (SM18) and the size switch assembly, Figure 2.
5. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
5-1 Release two bosses.
5-2 Release two hooks.
5-3 Release two bosses.
5-4 Remove the optional 550 feeder left side cover.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-47 REP 10.3
6. Disconnect connector P/J814, Figure 2. Replacement
7. Remove one screw and the size switch assembly, Figure 2.
NOTE: Before installing the option feeder left side cover, set the option feeder lock assembly to
the lock position, Figure 3.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 10.3 4-48 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 10.4 LED harness Assembly Kit
Parts List on PL 3.1 Item 5.
Initial Actions
1. Remove the MSI drive assembly, REP 3.2.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
In the following step, avoid tearing off the LED harness assembly by gently pulling off the
option feeder left front cover.
1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
1-1 Push the hook
1-2 Remove the left optional front cover.
2. Disconnect connector P/J814 from the left front cover.
3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1.
3-1 Release the hook.
3-2 Remove the shade tray cover and tray LED assembly.
4. Remove one screw (SM18) from the 550 option feeder left side cover.
5. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
5-1 Release two bosses at the rear side.
5-2 Release two hooks at the bottom
5-3 Release two bosses at the front side and the left side optional 550 feeder cover.
6. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-49 REP 10.4
6-1 Disconnect connector P/J813. Replacement
6-2 Remove two ties and the LED harness assembly. CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
NOTE: Before installing the option feeder left side cover, set the option feeder lock assembly to
the lock position as shown in Figure 3.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 10.4 4-50 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 10.6 Feed Roller Assembly Kit (Optional Feeder)
Parts List on PL 10.2
Prerequisites:
Remove the optional 550 feeder assembly from the printer, REP 10.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Hold positions A and B and turn the optional 550 feeder upside down, Figure 1.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-51 REP 10.6
REP 10.7 No Paper Actuator (Optional Feeder)
Parts List on PL 10.2
Initial Action
Remove the optional feeder assembly REP 10.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Hold the 550 option feeder assembly using positions A and B, then turn the feeder up side
down, Figure 1.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 10.7 4-52 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Replacement REP 10.8 550 Option Cassette Assembly
When replacing the no paper actuator, make sure to snap portion A shown in Figure 2 back Parts List on PL 10.3
into its original position.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly from the 550 option feeder assembly, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-53 REP 10.7, REP 10.8
REP 10.9 Cassette Separator Holder Assembly (Option REP 10.10 Tray Dust Cover
Feeder) Parts List on PL 10.3
Parts List on PL 10.3 Removal
Removal WARNING
WARNING Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly, REP 10.8.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly, REP 10.8. 2. Remove the legal paper tray cover, Figure 1.
2. Release the hook on the holder, Figure 1.
3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
3-1 Rotate the cassette separator holder assembly.
3-2 Remove the cassette separator holder assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 10.9, REP 10.10 4-54 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 10.11 Cassette Separator Roll Kit
Parts List on PL 10.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 550 option cassette assembly, REP 10.8.
2. Release the hook on the holder, Figure 1.
3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
3-1 Rotate the cassette separator holder assembly.
3-2 Remove the cassette separator holder assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-55 REP 10.11
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 10.11 4-56 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 11.1 Right Side Cover Replacement
Parts List on PL 11.1 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-57 REP 11.1
REP 11.2 Left Front Corner, Shade Tray LED and PWB LED
Cover
Parts List on PL 11.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 11.2 4-58 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 11.3 Left Side Cover
Parts List on PL 11.2
Prerequisites:
Remove the left front cover REP 11.2.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-59 REP 11.3
REP 11.4 Rear Cover Replacement
Parts List on PL 11.3 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
1. Remove the left front corner, shade tray LED, PWB LED cover, REP 11.2.
2. Remove left side cover, REP 11.3.
3. Remove the right side cover, REP 11.1.
4. Remove the rear cover, Figure 1.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 11.4 4-60 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 11.5 Feeder Assembly
Parts List on PL 11.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
1. Remove the left front corner, shade tray LED, PWB LED cover,REP 11.2.
2. Remove left side cover, REP 11.3.
3. Remove the right side cover, REP 11.1.
4. Remove the rear cover, REP 11.4.
5. Remove the spring from the guide harness, Figure 1.
8. Remove one screw and the ground plate on the feeder, Figure 1.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-61 REP 11.5
Replacement REP 11.6 harness Assembly LED
1. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 11.1
2. Be sure to insert the harness assembly through the holes in the frame, Figure 2.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
1. Remove the left front corner, shade tray LED, PWB LED cover, REP 11.2.
2. Remove left side cover, REP 11.3.
3. Disconnect connector, P/J813, Figure 1.
4. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 1:
4-1. Release the harness from the two push-tie connectors.
4-2. Remove the harness assembly.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 11.5, REP 11.6 4-62 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 11.7 Optional Paper Feeder (OPF) PWB
Parts List on PL 11.2 Item 3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
1. Remove the left front corner, shade tray LED cover, PWB LED, REP 11.2.
2. Remove left side cover, REP 11.3.
3. Disconnect all the connectors from the OPF PWB, Figure 1.
4. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 1:
4-1. Remove four screws, SM 18.
4-2. Remove the OPF PWB.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-63 REP 11.6, REP 11.7
REP 11.8 Main Motor Assembly
Parts List on PL 11.2 Item 4
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
1. Remove the left front corner, shade tray LED, PWB LED cover, REP 11.2.
2. Remove left side cover, REP 11.3.
3. Remove the spring from the guide harness, Figure 1.
4. Disconnect the following connectors, Figure 1:
P/J803
P/J804
P/J805
P/J808
P/J822
5. Release the harness, Figure 1:
6. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 1:
6-1. Remove one screw, SM18.
6-2. Release two hooks to release the guide harness.
7. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 1:
7-1. Remove three screws.
7-2. Remove the main motor assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 11.7, REP 11.8 4-64 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 11.9 Main Motor Assembly P1
Parts List on PL 11.2 Item 4
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
1. Remove the left front corner, shade tray LED, PWB LED cover, REP 11.2.
2. Remove left side cover, REP 11.3.
3. Remove the right side cover, REP 11.1.
4. Remove the rear cover, REP 11.4.
5. Disconnect P/J821, Figure 1.
6. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 1:
6-1. Remove three screws, SM18.
6-2. Remove the main motor assembly P1.
Figure 1 Main motor assembly
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-65 REP 11.8, REP 11.9
REP 11.10 Rear Interlock Switch
Parts List on PL 11.3 Item 4
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
1. Remove the left front corner, shade tray LED, PWB LED cover, REP 11.2.
2. Remove left side cover, REP 11.3.
3. Remove the right side cover, REP 11.1.
4. Remove the rear cover, REP 11.4.
5. Disconnect P/J824, Figure 1.
6. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 1:
6-1. Release one clamp.
6-2. Release four clamps.
6-3. Remove the harness.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 11.9, REP 11.10 4-66 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Figure 2 Rear interlock switch removal
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-67 REP 11.10
REP 11.11 Feed and Separator Rollers
Parts List on PL 11.4 Item 2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to GP 41.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 11.11 4-68 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
3. Pull and lift the HCF feeder drawer off the slide-rails to remove the HCF feeder drawer.
4. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
4-1 Rotate the lever.
4-2 Remove the feed and separation lever.
Replacement
1. Push both slide rails all the way into the cabinet, Figure 3.
2. Align the side rails, on the rear of the HCF feeder drawer, with the slide rails in the cabinet. Figure 3 Installing the HCF feeder drawer
3. Push the HCF feeder drawer into place.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-69 REP 11.11
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 11.11 4-70 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 13.1 Bypass Tray Frame Assembly Replacement
Parts List on PL 13.1 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Initial Action:
Remove the front inner cover REP 19.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-71 REP 13.1
REP 13.2 Bypass Tray Feed Roller 3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
3-1 Slide the bypass tray feed roll up the shaft.
Parts List on PL 13.1
3-2 Rotate the bypass tray feed roll as shown.
Initial Action1-1 4. Remove the bypass tray feed roll from the shaft, Figure 2.
Remove the MSI bypass tray assembly, REP 13.6.
5. Remove the bypass tray feed roller, Figure 2.
Removal
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
1-1 Release the hook.
1-2 Slide the feed roll
2. Align the hook with the slit and slide it down the shaft, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 13.2 4-72 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 13.3 Bypass Tray No Paper Sensor 3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
3-1 Release the three hooks
Parts List on PL 13.1
3-2 Remove the bypass no paper sensor.
Initial Action
Remove the bypass tray frame assembly, REP 13.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-73 REP 13.3
REP 13.4 Bypass Tray Turn around 1 Roller Assembly Kit
Parts List on PL 13.1
Initial Action
Remove the bypass tray frame assembly REP 13.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 13.4 4-74 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 13.5 Bypass Tray Turn Around 2 Roller Assembly Kit
Parts List on PL 13.1
Initial Action
Remove the bypass tray frame assembly REP 13.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
1. Remove four screws (ST 20) holding the guide tray, Figure 1.
Replacement
When replacing the roller, use only the parts in the spares kit that are required for this part.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-75 REP 13.4, REP 13.5
Figure 2 Remove the guide tray
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 13.5 4-76 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 13.6 Main Bypass Tray (MSI) Assembly
Parts List on PL 13.2
Prerequisites:
Perform the IOT cassette assembly, PL 9.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
Replacement
When replacing the roller, use only the parts in the spares kit that are required for this part.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-77 REP 13.5, REP 13.6
REP 13.7 Bypass Tray Separator Holder Assembly REP 13.8 Bypass Cover Assembly
Parts List on PL 13.2 Parts List on PL 13.2
Removal Initial Action
WARNING Remove the main bypass tray assembly, REP 13.6.
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause Removal
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41. Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
1. Remove the main bypass tray assembly, REP 13.6. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
2-1 Release the two hooks
2-2 Remove the bypass separator holder assembly from the main bypass tray 1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
assembly. 1-1 Remove two screws (ST20).
1-2 Remove the front bypass bar.
2. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
2-1 Flex the bypass chute to release the four bosses.
2-2 Remove the bypass cover assembly.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 13.7, REP 13.8 4-78 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Figure 1 Remove the bypass cover assembly
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-79 REP 13.8
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 13.8 4-80 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 14.1 Duplex Relay Cover
Parts List on PL 14.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.2 Item 99.
2. Release two latches attaching the duplex relay cover, PL 14.1 Item 5, to the rear cover
assembly and remove.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-81 REP 14.1
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 14.1 4-82 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 15.1 Option Registration Chute 2. Remove the optional 550 chute, Figure 2:
1 Release two hooks.
Parts List on PL 15.1
2 Remove the optional 550 chute.
Initial Action
Remove one of the following:
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-83 REP 15.1
3. Remove the upper duplex chute, Figure 3: 4. Perform the items that follow, Figure 4:
1 Two screws. 1 Remove one screw.
2 Upper duplex chute. 2 Pull the feeder chute out as shown.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 15.1 4-84 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
5. Remove the feeder registration chute assembly, Figure 5: Replacement
1 Four screws. Replacement is the reverse of the repair procedure.
2 Registration feeder chute assembly.
3 Disconnect two connectors.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-85 REP 15.1
REP 15.2 Duplex Registration Roller Assembly Kit 2. Remove the duplex registration roll assembly, Figure 2:
a. Disconnect connector P/J541 (1).
Parts List on PL 15.1 Item 99
b. Remove two screws (2).
Removal
NOTE: When removing the Duplex Roller Registration Assembly, bearings and gears will
WARNING move out of their seated positions. For easier replacement later, carefully observe the
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- placement and orientation of bearings and gears at both ends of the roller assembly
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause before removing it.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
c. Remove the two E-rings (3) from the duplex registration roller assembly.
1. Remove the upper chute assembly, Figure 1.
d. Remove three screws (4).
a. Remove two screws (1).
e. Slide the duplex roll assembly in the direction of the arrow (5).
b. Remove the upper chute assembly (2).
f. Remove the duplex registration roll assembly in direction of the arrow (6).
Replacement
NOTE: Be sure to align bearings and gears at each end of the duplex registration roller assem-
bly so they are fully seated in their positions.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 15.2 4-86 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 15.3 Registration Chute Feeder Assembly 2. Remove the optional 550 chute, Figure 2:
a. Rotate the lower duplex chute 90° remove the lower duplex chute.
Parts List on PL 15.1
b. Release two hooks (1).
Initial Actions c. Remove the optional 550 chute (2) in the direction of the arrow.
Remove one of the items that follow:
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-87 REP 15.3
3. Remove the upper duplex chute, Figure 3: 4. Remove the feeder chute, Figure 4:
a. Remove two screws (1). Remove the screw (1).
b. Remove the upper duplex chute (2). Remove the feeder chute (2) in the direction of the arrow.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 15.3 4-88 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
5. Remove the registration feeder chute assembly, Figure 5: REP 15.4 No Paper Actuator (Registration)
a. Disconnect two connectors (1), P/J544, P/J545.
Parts List on PL 15.1
b. Remove four screws (2).
c. Remove the registration feeder chute assembly (3).
Initial Action
Remove the MSI bypass tray REP 13.6.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the no paper actuator, Figure 1:
a. Release the tab (A).
b. Remove the no paper actuator in the direction of the arrows.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-89 REP 15.3, REP 15.4
REP 15.5 Registration Actuator Replacement
Parts List on PL 15.2 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Initial Action
Remove the registration chute feeder assembly REP 15.3.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
In the following step, avoid losing the spring from the end of the Registration Actuator when
removing the actuator.
1. Remove the registration actuator assembly, Figure 1:
a. Rotate the registration actuator assembly in the direction of the arrow (1).
b. Remove the registration actuator assembly in the direction of the arrow (2).
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 15.5 4-90 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 15.6 Registration Sensor REP 15.7 Feed Roll Assembly
Parts List on PL 15.2 Item 13 Parts List on PL 15.2 Item 16
Initial Action Initial Action
Remove the registration chute feeder assembly, REP 15.3. Remove the MSI bypass tray assembly, REP 13.6.
Removal
Removal WARNING
WARNING Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. 1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
1. Remove the registration sensor, Figure 1: a. Remove the upper feed chute (1).
a. Release three hooks (1). b. Remove the feed roll assembly in the direction of the arrows (2).
b. Lift up the registration sensor (2).
c. Disconnect connector P/J546 (3), then remove the registration sensor (2).
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-91 REP 15.6, REP 15.7
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 15.6, REP 15.7 4-92 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 17.1 Exit Chute Assembly CAUTION
When removing the exit chute assembly, do not turn the exit cute assembly over or part A may
Parts List on PL 17.1 fall off, Figure 3.
Initial Action 3. Remove the items that follow, Figure 2:
WARNING 3-1 Two screws (SM18).
The Fuser is very hot. Take added care when handling the Fuser to avoid being burned. 3-2 Exit chute assembly.
Remove the fusing assembly, REP 7.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
1. MFP-Tall and SFP models only, remove two screws (SM18) to remove plate A., Figure 1.
2. MAP-Tall and SFP models only, remove four screws (SM18) to remove plate B, Figure 1.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-93 REP 17.1
REP 17.2 Main Exit Drive Assembly (High Model)
Parts List on PL 17.1
Initial Action
Remove one of the items that follow:
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
WARNING
The Fuser is very hot. Take added care when handling the Fuser to avoid being burned.
1. Disconnect connectors P/J460, P/J466, P/J468, Figure 1.
2. Release the harness from the harness guide.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 17.1, REP 17.2 4-94 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
4-2 Main exit drive assembly. REP 17.3 Full Stack Sensor (High Model)
Parts List on PL 17.1 Item 6.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
WARNING
The Fuser is very hot. Take added care when handling the Fuser to avoid being burned.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
1-1 Rotate the full stack actuator.
1-2 Remove the full stack sensor.
Replacement
When re-connecting the connectors P/J461, P/J462 onto the Exit Drive, refer to Figure 2 to
ensure each harness is connected to the correct terminal.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-95 REP 17.2, REP 17.3
REP 17.4 Full Stack Actuator Replacement
Parts List on PL 17.1 Item 7 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Initial Action
Remove the exit chute assembly, REP 17.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 17.4 4-96 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 18.1 MCU PWB CAUTION
In the following step, engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of
Parts List on PL 18.1 Item 1 the release lever will break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the
Removal PWB.
WARNING NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause shown in Figure 1.
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
1. Before starting removal, print a configuration page and verify the software version.
2. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1.
3. Print a configuration page again.
4. Verify the software version, update the software, GP 9 if not the current version.
CAUTION
Never install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time. The data is saved on
the EMMC card chip of the ESS PWB.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the MCU PWB:
• Do not install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time. The data is saved
on the EMMC Card on the ESS PWB. Install a new MCU PWB first, and then install a new Figure 1 Proper Removal of the FFC Cable
ESS PWB. At the time of each replacement, turn on the printer to restore the data into the
MCU PWB or ESS PWB.
Replace MCU PWB > Cycle pwr ON/OFF > Replace ESS PWB > Cycle pwr ON/OFF 8. Disconnect connectors P/J100, P/J110, P/J130, P/J140, P/J190, P/J200, P/J270, P/
• It is not necessary to back-up or restore data saved on the ESS PWB by Diagnostic, etc. J280, P/J290, P/J460, P/J480, P/J540, P/J550, P/J570 P/J800 and the FFC P/J300,
The data is automatically backed-up when the printer is turned off or in the Deep Sleep Figure 2.
mode. When the printer is turned on, mismatched information is detected on the MCU 9. Remove the items that follow, Figure 2:
PWB, and then the information is corrected to be matched and restored into the MCU
9-1 Four screws (SM18).
PWB
9-2 MCU PWB.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-97 REP 18.1
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC connected at the ESS PWB, the following steps are to be
observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC connec-
tor will allow insertion and lock on its own.
Figure 2 Remove the MCU PWB 4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.1 4-98 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.2 ESS MCU FCC
Parts List on PL 18.1 Item 2.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-99 REP 18.2
CAUTION
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 2.
Figure 2 Removal
Replacement
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the ESS MCU FFC, PL 18.1 Item 2, cable, the following steps are
to be observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC
connector will allow insertion and lock on its own.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.2 4-100 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.3 ESS PWB
Parts List on PL 18.1 Item 5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
1. Before starting removal, print a configuration page and verify the software version.
2. Install a new ESS PWB.
3. Print a configuration page again.
Figure 4 Cable Perpendicular Insertion
4. Verify the software version, update if not the current version, GP 9.
CAUTION
Never install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer GP 41.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the ESS PWB:
• Do not install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time. The data is saved
on the EMMC Card on the ESS PWB. Install a new MCU PWB first, and then install a new
ESS PWB. At the time of each replacement, turn on the printer to restore the data into the
Figure 5 Cable Parallel Connector Insertion MCU PWB or ESS PWB.
Replace MCU PWB > Switch the machine off then on GP 4 > Replace ESS PWB >
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the ESS MCU FCC cable into the con-
Switch the machin off then on GP 4.
nector until fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking
the FCC in-place. • It is not necessary to back-up or restore data saved on the ESS PWB by Diagnostic, etc.
The data is automatically backed-up when the printer is switched off or in the Deep Sleep
mode. When the printer is turned on, mismatched information is detected on the MCU
PWB, and then the information is corrected to be matched and restored into the MCU
PWB.
• When replacing the ESS PWB, it is necessary to move the EMMC Card from the
original ESS PWB to the replacement ESS PWB.
Avoid using excessive pressure to remove or install the EMMC Card. Follow proper elec-
trostatic discharge procedures to prevent damage to the ESS Card during replacement.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-101 REP 18.2, REP 18.3
12. Remove the ESS FFC MCU, REP 18.2. 16-1 Remove six screws (SM18) and two screws (SM1).
13. Remove the two screws (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the earth cable to the FAX plate, Fig- 16-2 Remove the MFP ESS PWB.
ure 1.
14. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
14-1 Remove two screws (SM18).
14-2 Remove the FAX plate assembly.
CAUTION
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 2.
17. Disconnect all Cables, carefully move the harnesses out of the way and remove the
ESS PWB from the frame leaving all harnesses and guides in-place, Figure 4.
15. Disengage the connectors, P/J301, P/J345, P/J1337, P/J1352, and the FFCs P/J335,
P/J1363, Figure 3.
16. Perform the items that follow, Figure 3:.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.3 4-102 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
19. Slide the ESS PWB from the Right Side of the ESS Frame, carefully ease the ESS
PWB out of the ESS Frame, Figure 6.
18. Lift the Bottom Right Corner from the ESS Frame, carefully ease the ESS PWB from Figure 6 Slide the ESS PWB from the Right Side of the ESS Frame
the ESS Frame, Figure 5.
20. Slide the ESS PWB Out of the ESS Frame, to remove the ESS PWB from the ESS
Frame entirely, Figure 7.
Figure 5 Lift the Bottom Right Corner from the ESS Frame
Figure 7 Remove the ESS PWB from the ESS Frame
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-103 REP 18.3
21. The ESS PWB removal is complete. Removal Complete with FCC Guides Remaining
In-place, Figure 8
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the five FFC cables connected at the ESS PWB, the follow-
ing steps are to be observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC
cable, the FFC connector will allow insertion and lock on its own.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.3 4-104 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.4 FAX PWB REP 18.5 ICCR USB Harness Assembly
Parts List on PL 18.1 Parts List on PL 18.1
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left side cover, PL 19.2 Item 2. 1. Remove the UI harness, PL 1.1 Item 5.
2. Remove the ESS Top plate, PL 18.1 Item 18. 2. Unplug the connector (P/J345).
3. Unplug the connector (P/J1350) from the FAX PWB. 3. Release the USB ICCR harness assembly, PL 18.1 Item 13, from the DC harness guide,
4. Refer to Figure 1, to remove the two screws (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the FAX PWB. PL 18.3 Item 9, and the guides on the top cover, PL 19.1 Item 15.
4. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM3, silver, M4X6mm), one screw (ST20, screw for
plastic silver, tapping, M3x8) and remove the USB ICCR harness assembly and the USB
ICCR bracket, PL 18.1 Item 31, from the top cover.
5. Refer to Figure 1, remove two screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the USB ICCR
harness assembly from the USB ICCR bracket.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-105 REP 18.4, REP 18.5
REP 18.6 Front USB Harness Assembly
Parts List on PL 18.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the UI harness, PL 1.1 Item 5.
2. Unplug the connector (P/J1337).
3. Refer to Figure 1, release the front USB harness assembly, PL 18.1 Item 14, from the DC
guide harness, PL 18.3 Item 9, and the guides on the top cover, PL 19.1 Item 15.
4. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM3, silver, M4X6mm), and one screw (ST20,
screw for plastic, silver, tapping, M3x8) to remove the front USB harness assembly and
the USB bracket, PL 18.1 Item 32, from the top cover.
5. Release the Front USB Harness from the harness guide.
6. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the front USB
harness assembly from the USB bracket.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse or the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.5, REP 18.6 4-106 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.7 LVPS PWB
Parts List on PL 18.1
Parts List on PL 18.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left side cover, PL 19.2 Item 1.
2. Disconnect all connectors from the LVPS, Figure 1.
3. Remove the seven screws (M18, silver, M3x6mm) attaching the LVPS PWB to the LVPS
plate and remove the LVPS, Figure 1.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-107 REP 18.6, REP 18.7
REP 18.8 HVPS PWB
Parts List on PL 18.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LPH mono head assembly, REP 2.1.
2. Remove the HVPS cover, Figure 1:
a. Release three hooks (1), on the front side of the HVPS cover.
b. Release one hook (2), on the back side of the HVPS cover, then remove the HVPS
cover (3).
Replacement
When replacing the LVPS PWB, be sure to place the holes in the board’s upper and lower right
corners onto the alignment tabs before inserting any screws.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.7, REP 18.8 4-108 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
3. Remove the HVPS PWB, Figure 2:
a. Remove two screws, (1).
b. Release two hooks (2), disengages two connectors (3) P/J1001 and T401, then
remove the PWBA HVPS (4).
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-109 REP 18.8
REP 18.9 HVPS Toner Cover
Parts List on PL 18.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the drum cartridge, PL 8.1.
2. Remove the HVPS toner cover, PL 18.2 Item 3, from the HVPS PWB, Figure 1.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.8, REP 18.9 4-110 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.10 Second Bias Transfer Roll Housing Kit REP 18.11 AC Fusing Harness
Parts List on PL 18.2 Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the right Side cover, PL 19.1 Item 2. 1. Remove the exit chute assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1 (C505/C605), (C500/C600).
2. Open the rear door, PL 19.2 Item 99. 2. Refer to Figure 1, release one boss of the harness guide, and slightly release the harness
3. Refer to Figure 1, to remove the one screw (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the high voltage guide with the harnesses in the direction of the arrow.
harness. 3. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the plate.
4. Refer to Figure 1, to release the two hooks and remove the second bias transfer housing
the housing.
4. Refer to Figure 2, release the AC fusing harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 3, from the har-
Figure 1 Remove the second bias transfer housing ness guides.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-111 REP 18.10, REP 18.11
Figure 3 Remove AC fusing harness assembly with the fusing harness guide.
6. Remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly and AC fusing harness assembly from the
fusing harness guide.
7. Remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly from the AC fusing harness assembly, Fig-
ure 4.
5. Refer to Figure 3, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm), and release three hooks to
remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2, and AC fusing harness
assembly, PL 18.3 Item 3, with the fusing harness guide, PL 18.3 Item 4.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.11 4-112 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.12 Rear Interlock Harness Assembly
Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the AIO ESS Box, PL 18.1 Item 15.
2. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector (P/J292) from the LVPS PWB and release the
cable from the cable guide.
3. Release the Rear-CF I/L harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4, from the DC harness guide,
PL 18.3 Item 9, and the Rear-CF I/L Harness guide, PL 18.3 Item 11.
4. Refer to Figure 1, release the two hooks and remove the rear interlock harness assembly.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-113 REP 18.11, REP 18.12
REP 18.13 Side Interlock Harness Assembly
Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.1 Item 13.
2. Refer to Figure 1, release the Side-CF I/L harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 5, from the DC
harness guide, PL 18.3 Item 9, and the duct harness guide, PL 18.3 Item 10.
3. Refer to Figure 1, pull out the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from the hole A.
6. Refer to Figure 3, remove the waste link, PL 19.1 Item 13 and the waste link spring, PL
19.1 Item 14.
7. Refer to Figure 3, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) and pull out the Side-CF I/
L harness assembly from the hole B.
NOTE: In the following steps, be sure to note the harness routing to avoid damaging wires dur-
ing replacement.
4. Refer to Figure 2, release the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from the sub fan duct, PL 4.1
Item 4.
5. Refer to Figure 2, remove the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from one push-tie of the sub
fan duct.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.13 4-114 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.14 OPF-CF Harness Assembly
Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.1 Item 13.
NOTE: In the following steps, be sure to note the harness routing to avoid damaging wires dur-
ing replacement.
2. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector (P/J800) and release the harness portion of the
OPF-CF harness assembly from the four hooks of the harness guide.
3. Refer to Figure 1, push the two hooks on the OPF-CF harness assembly and remove the
OPF-CF harness assembly.
Figure 3 Pull out the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from the hole B.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-115 REP 18.13, REP 18.14
REP 18.15 Size Switch Assembly
Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.1 Item 13.
NOTE: In the following steps, be sure to note the harness routing to avoid damaging wires dur-
ing replacement.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.14, REP 18.15 4-116 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.16 MCU PWB (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
1. Before starting removal, print a configuration page and verify the software version.
2. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.1 Item 1.
3. Print a configuration page again.
4. Verify the software version, update the software GP 9 if not the current version.
CAUTION
Never install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the MCU PWB:
• Do not install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time. The data is saved
on the EMMC Card on the ESS PWB. Install a new MCU PWB first, and then install a new
ESS PWB. At the time of each replacement, turn on the printer to restore the data into the
MCU PWB or ESS PWB.
Replace MCU PWB > Cycle pwr ON/OFF > Replace ESS PWB > Cycle pwr ON/OFF
• It is not necessary to back-up or restore data saved on the ESS PWB by Diagnostic, etc.
The data is automatically backed-up when the printer is turned off or in the Deep Sleep
mode. When the printer is turned on, mismatched information is detected on the MCU
PWB, and then the information is corrected to be matched and restored into the MCU
PWB
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-117 REP 18.15, REP 18.16
CAUTION
In the following step, engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of
the release lever will break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the
PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 1, Proper Removal of the FFC Cable.
2. Refer to Figure 2, unplug connectors (P/J100, P/J110, P/J120, P/J130, P/J140, P/J190,
P/J200, P/J220, P/J270, P/J280, P/J290, P/J400, P/J460, P/J480, P/J500, P/J520, P/
J540, P/J550, P/J560, P/J570, P/J800) and the FFC (P/J300).
3. Refer to Figure 2, remove four screws (silver, M3x6mm) securing MCU PWB, PL 18.5
Item 1, and remove the MCU PWB.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC connected at the ESS PWB, the following steps are to be
observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC connec-
tor will allow insertion and lock on its own.
1. Slip the core down the FFC cable.
2. To ease installation and ensure proper alignment of the FFC cable, bend the blue “grip
tab” 90 degrees perpendicular to the FFC.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.16 4-118 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
3. Referring to Figure 3 and Figure 4, Proper FFC Cable Insertion, grasp the grip tab of the REP 18.17 FCC MCU ESS (MFP Tall)
FFC cable placing the back, or non-conductive Side, of the FFC cable against the edge of
the connector and centered to the connector. Parts List on PL 18.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left side cover, PL 19.2 Item 1.
2. Refer to Figure 1, remove two screws (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the ESS Lower plate
and remove the plate.
3. Refer to Figure 1, remove two screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) and remove HDD bracket,
PL 18.1 Item 28.
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-119 REP 18.16, REP 18.17
CAUTION
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 2.
4. Unplug connectors (P/J300, P/J335) and remove the ESS MCU FCC.
Replacement
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the ESS MCU FFC, PL 18.1 Item 2, cable, the following steps are
to be observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC
connector will allow insertion and lock on its own.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.17 4-120 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.18 ESS PWB (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
1. Before starting removal, print a configuration page and verify the software version.
2. Install a new ESS PWB.
3. Print a configuration page again.
Figure 4 Cable Perpendicular Insertion
4. Verify the software version, update if not the current version GP 9.
CAUTION
Never install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the ESS PWB:
• Do not install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time. The data is saved
on the EMMC Card on the ESS PWB. Install a new MCU PWB first, and then install a new
ESS PWB. At the time of each replacement, turn on the printer to restore the data into the
MCU PWB or ESS PWB.
Figure 5 Cable Parallel Insertion Replace MCU PWB > Switch the machine off then on GP 4 > Replace ESS PWB >
Switch the machin off then on GP 4.
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the ESS MCU FCC cable into the con- • It is not necessary to back-up or restore data saved on the ESS PWB by Diagnostic, etc.
nector until fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking The data is automatically backed-up when the printer is switched off or in the Deep Sleep
the FCC in-place. mode. When the printer is turned on, mismatched information is detected on the MCU
PWB, and then the information is corrected to be matched and restored into the MCU
PWB.
• When replacing the ESS PWB, it is necessary to move the EMMC Card from the
original ESS PWB to the replacement ESS PWB.
Avoid using excessive pressure to remove or install the EMMC Card. Follow proper elec-
trostatic discharge procedures to prevent damage to the ESS Card during replacement.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-121 REP 18.17, REP 18.18
CAUTION
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 2.
5. Refer to Figure 3, disengage the connectors (P/J301, P/J345, P/J356, P/J1337, P/J1352,
P/J1372, P/J1373, P/J1374, P/J1377) and the FFCs (P/J1360, P/J1361, P/J1362, P/
J1363, P/J1370, P/J1371, P/J335).
6. Refer to Figure 3, remove six screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) and two screws (SM1, sil-
Figure 1 Remove the FAX plate (MFP Tall) ver, M3Xmm) and remove the ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 5.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.18 4-122 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Figure 4 Disconnect all Cables
8. Refer to Figure 5, Lift the Bottom Right Corner from the ESS Frame, carefully ease the
ESS PWB from the ESS Frame.
7. Refer to Figure 4, Disconnect all Cables, carefully move the harnesses out of the way
and remove the ESS PWB from the frame leaving all harnesses and guides in-place.
Figure 5 Lift the Bottom Right Corner from the ESS Frame
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-123 REP 18.18
9. Refer to Figure 6, Slide the ESS PWB from the Right Side of the ESS Frame, carefully 11. The ESS PWB removal is complete, Figure 8, Removal Complete with FCC Guides
ease the ESS PWB out of the ESS Frame. Remaining In-place
Figure 6 Slide the ESS PWB from the Right Side of the ESS Frame Figure 8 Removal Complete with FCC Guides Remaining In-place
10. Refer to Figure 7, Slide the ESS PWB Out of the ESS Frame, to remove the ESS PWB Replacement
from the ESS Frame entirely.
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
1. Be sure to move the EMMC Card from the original ESS PWB to the new one.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the five FFC cables connected at the ESS PWB, the follow-
ing steps are to be observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC
cable, the FFC connector will allow insertion and lock on its own.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.18 4-124 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.19 FAX PWB (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left side cover, PL 19.2 Item 2.
2. Remove the ESS Top plate, PL 18.1 Item 18.
3. Disconnect the connector ( P/J1350) from the FAX PWB.
4. Remove the two screws (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the FAX PWB, Figure 1.
Figure 9 Cable Perpendicular Insertion
5. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-125 REP 18.18, REP 18.19
REP 18.20 ICCR USB Harness Assembly (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the UI harness, PL 1.1 Item 5.
2. Disconnect the connector (P/J345).
3. Release the USB ICCR harness assembly, PL 18.1 Item 13, from the DC harness guide,
PL 18.3 Item 9, and the guides on the top cover, PL 19.1 Item 15.
4. Remove the two screws (SM3 silver M4X6mm and ST20 plastic silver M3x8) to remove
the USB ICCR harness assembly and the USB ICCR bracket, PL 18.1 Item 31, from the
top cover, Figure 1.
5. Remove two screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the USB ICCR harness assem-
bly from the USB ICCR bracket, Figure 1.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.20 4-126 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.21 Front USB Harness Assembly (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.5 Item 14 (C605 Tall)
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the UI harness, PL 1.1 Item 5.
2. Unplug the connector (P/J1337).
3. Refer to Figure 1, release the front USB harness assembly, PL 18.1 Item 14, from the DC
guide harness, PL 18.3 Item 9, and the guides on the top cover, PL 19.1 Item 15.
4. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM3, silver, M4X6mm), and one screw (ST20,
screw for plastic, silver, tapping, M3x8) to remove the front USB harness assembly and
the USB bracket, PL18.1.32, from the top cover.
5. Release the Front USB Harness from the harness guide.
6. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the front USB
harness assembly from the USB bracket.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-127 REP 18.21
REP 18.22 LVPS PWB (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left side cover, PL 19.2 Item 1.
2. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connectors (P/J281, P/J283, P/J284, P/J285, P/J286, P/
J287, P/J288, P/J289, P/J291, P/J292, P/J293, P/J295) from the LVPS PWB.
3. Refer to Figure 1, remove the seven screws (M18, silver, M3x6mm) attaching the LVPS
PWB to the LVPS plate and remove the LVPS PWB.
Replacement
When replacing the LVPS PWB, be sure to place the holes in the board’s upper and lower right
corners onto the alignment tabs before inserting any screws.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.22 4-128 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.23 HVPS Guide Assembly (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.6
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1, remove the HVPS guide assembly (MFP Tall), to remove the HVPS
toner cover, PL 18.1 Item 3.
2. Refer to Figure 1, remove the HVPS guide assembly (MFP Tall), to remove the screw (sil-
ver, M3x6mm) located under the HVPS toner cover.
3. Refer to Figure 1, remove the HVPS guide assembly (MFP Tall), and push the faston
holders in the direction of the arrows to remove the faston terminals (P/J501, P/J502,
T601).
4. Refer to Figure 1, disconnect the connector, ( P/J100).
5. Refer to Figure 1, release the two hooks and remove the HVPS guide assembly in the
direction of the arrow.
Replacement
To install a new HVPS guide assembly:
1. Connect the connector P/J101.
2. Place the HVPS guide assembly into its installed position making sure to insert the align-
ment tabs at the left edge of the board into their slots.
3. Slide the faston connector holders towards the board to reconnect the plugs.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-129 REP 18.23
NOTE: Make sure to attach the faston connectors (P/J501, P/J502, T601: K 1st supply REP 18.24 HVPS Toner Cover (MFP Tall)
harness assembly, PL 18.2 Item 7, YMC 1st supply harness assembly, PL 18.2 Item 6,
and trans supply harness assembly, PL 18.2 Item 8, at the initial position as shown in Fig- Parts List on PL 18.6
ure 2. Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the drum cartridges Y, M, C, K, PL 8.1.
2. Refer to Figure 1, to remove the HVPS toner cover from the HVPS PWB.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.23 , REP 18.24 4-130 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.25 Second Bias Transfer Roller Kit (MFP Tall) REP 18.26 AC Fusing Harness (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.6 Parts List on PL 18.7
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the right Side cover, PL 19.1 Item 2. 1. Remove the exit chute assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1 (C505/C605), (C500/C600).
2. Open the rear door, PL 19.2 Item 99 2. Refer to Figure 1, release one boss of the harness guide, and slightly release the harness
3. Refer to Figure 1, to remove the one screw (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the high voltage guide with the harnesses in the direction of the arrow.
harness. 3. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the plate.
4. Refer to Figure 1, to release the two hooks and remove the second bias transfer housing
the housing.
4. Refer to Figure 2, release the AC fusing harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 3, from the har-
Figure 1 Remove the second bias transfer housing (MFP Tall) ness guides.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-131 REP 18.25 , REP 18.26
Figure 3 Remove AC fusing harness assembly with the fusing harness guide.
6. Remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2, and AC fusing harness
assembly from the fusing harness guide.
7. Remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 2, from the AC fusing harness
assembly.
5. Refer to Figure 3, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm), and release three hooks to
remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly PL 18.3 Item 2, and AC fusing harness
assembly with the fusing harness guide.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.26 4-132 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.27 Rear Interlock Harness Assembly (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.7
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the AIO ESS Box, PL 18.1 Item 15.
2. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector (P/J292) from the LVPS PWB and release the
cable from the cable guide.
3. Release the Rear-CF I/L harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 4, from the DC harness guide,
PL 18.3 Item 9, and the Rear-CF I/L Harness guide, PL 18.3 Item 11.
4. Refer to Figure 1, release the two hooks and remove the rear interlock harness assembly.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-133 REP 18.26 , REP 18.27
REP 18.28 Side Interlock Harness Assembly (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.7
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.1 Item 13.
2. Refer to Figure 1, release the Side-CF I/L harness assembly, PL 18.3 Item 5, from the DC
harness guide, PL 18.3 Item 9, and the duct harness guide, PL 18.3 Item 10.
3. Refer to Figure 1, pull out the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from the hole A.
6. Refer to Figure 3, remove the waste link, PL 19.1 Item 13 and the waste link spring, PL
19.1 Item 14.
7. Refer to Figure 3, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) and pull out the Side-CF I/
L harness assembly from the hole B.
NOTE: In the following steps, be sure to note the harness routing to avoid damaging wires dur-
ing replacement.
4. Refer to Figure 2, release the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from the sub fan duct, PL 4.1
Item 4.
5. Refer to Figure 2, remove the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from one push-tie of the sub
fan duct.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.28 4-134 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.29 OPF Harness Assembly (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.7
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.1 Item 13.
NOTE: In the following steps, be sure to note the harness routing to avoid damaging wires dur-
ing replacement.
2. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector (P/J800) and release the harness portion of the
OPF harness assembly from the four hooks of the harness guide.
3. Refer to Figure 1, push the two hooks on the OPF harness assembly and remove the
OPF harness assembly
Figure 3 Pull out the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from the hole B.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-135 REP 18.28 , REP 18.29
REP 18.30 Size Switch Assembly (MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 18.7
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.1 Item 13.
NOTE: In the following steps, be sure to note the harness routing to avoid damaging wires dur-
ing replacement.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.29, REP 18.30 4-136 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.31 MCU PWB (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.1 (C500/C505)
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
1. Before starting removal, print a configuration page and verify the software version.
2. Install a new MCU PWB, PL 18.9 Item 1.
3. Print a configuration page again.
4. Verify the software version, update the software GP 9 if not the current version.
CAUTION
Never install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the MCU PWB:
• Do not install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time. The data is saved
on the EMMC Card on the ESS PWB. Install a new MCU PWB first, and then install a new
ESS PWB. At the time of each replacement, turn on the printer to restore the data into the
MCU PWB or ESS PWB.
Replace MCU PWB > Cycle pwr ON/OFF > Replace ESS PWB > Cycle pwr ON/OFF
• It is not necessary to back-up or restore data saved on the ESS PWB by Diagnostic, etc.
The data is automatically backed-up when the printer is turned off or in the Deep Sleep
mode. When the printer is turned on, mismatched information is detected on the MCU
PWB, and then the information is corrected to be matched and restored into the MCU
PWB
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-137 REP 18.30, REP 18.31
CAUTION
In the following step, engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of
the release lever will break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the
PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 1, Proper Removal of the FFC Cable.
2. Refer to Figure 2, unplug connectors (P/J100, P/J110, P/J120, P/J130, P/J140, P/J190,
P/J200, P/J220, P/J270, P/J280, P/J290, P/J400, P/J460, P/J480, P/J500, P/J520, P/
J540, P/J550, P/J560, P/J570, P/J800) and the FFC (P/J300).
3. Refer to Figure 2, remove four screws (silver, M3x6mm) securing MCU PWB, PL 18.9
Item 1, and remove the MCU PWB.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC connected at the ESS PWB, the following steps are to be
observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC connec-
tor will allow insertion and lock on its own.
1. Slip the core down the FFC cable.
2. To ease installation and ensure proper alignment of the FFC cable, bend the blue “grip
tab” 90 degrees perpendicular to the FFC.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.31 4-138 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
3. Refer to Figure 3 and Figure 4, Proper FFC Cable Insertion, grasp the grip tab of the REP 18.32 ESS MCU FFC (SFP)
FFC cable placing the back, or non-conductive Side, of the FFC cable against the edge of
the connector and centered to the connector. Parts List on PL 18.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left side cover, PL 19.6 Item 1.
2. Refer to Figure 1, remove two screws (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the ESS lower plate and
remove the plate.
3. Refer to Figure 1, remove two screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) and remove the HDD
Bracket, PL 18.9 Item 28.
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-139 REP 18.31, REP 18.32
CAUTION
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 2.
4. Unplug the connectors (P/J300, P/J335) and remove the ESS MCU FCC. Figure 4 Cable Parallel Insertion
Replacement
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the ESS MCU FCC cable into the con-
nector until fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the ESS MCU FFC, PL 18.9 Item 2, cable, the following steps are the FCC in-place.
to be observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC
connector will allow insertion and lock on its own.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.32 4-140 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.33 ESS PWB (SFP) 7. Refer to Figure 1, remove six screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) and two screws (SM1, sil-
ver, M3Xmm) and Earth plate of the USB connector, and then remove the ESS PWB
Parts List on PL 18.1 (SFP), PL 18.9 Item 5.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
1. Before starting removal, print a configuration page and verify the software version.
2. Install a new ESS PWB, PL 18.9 Item 5.
3. Print a configuration page again.
4. Verify the software version, update the software GP 9 if not the current version.
CAUTION
Never install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time.
NOTE: Observe the following when removing or replacing the ESS PWB:
• Do not install a new MCU PWB and a new ESS PWB at the same time. The data is saved
on the EMMC Card on the ESS PWB. Install a new MCU PWB first, and then install a new
ESS PWB. At the time of each replacement, turn on the printer to restore the data into the
MCU PWB or ESS PWB.
Replace MCU PWB > Switch the machine off then on GP 4 > Replace ESS PWB >
Switch the machine off then on GP 4.
• It is not necessary to back-up or restore data saved on the ESS PWB by Diagnostic, etc.
The data is automatically backed-up when the printer is switched off or in the Deep Sleep
mode. When the printer is turned on, mismatched information is detected on the MCU
PWB, and then the information is corrected to be matched and restored into the MCU
PWB.
• When replacing the ESS PWB, it is necessary to move the EMMC Card from the
original ESS PWB to the replacement ESS PWB.
Avoid using excessive pressure to remove or install the EMMC Card. Follow proper elec-
trostatic discharge procedures to prevent damage to the ESS Card during replacement.
NOTE: Please refer to Figure 1, Proper Removal of the ESS MCU FFC Cable to ensure
no damage to the cable or the connector release latch occurs. Damage to the FFC cable
and/or release latch could result in replacement required or damage to other components.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-141 REP 18.33
CAUTION 9. Refer to Figure 4, Lift the Bottom Right Corner from the ESS Frame, carefully ease the
Engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of the release lever will ESS PWB from the ESS Frame.
break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly open the release lever
no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connector as
shown in Figure 2.
8. Refer to Figure 3, Disconnect all Cables, carefully move the harnesses out of the way Figure 4 Lift the Bottom Right Corner from the ESS Frame
and remove the ESS PWB from the frame leaving all harnesses and guides in-place.
10. Refer to Figure 5, Slide the ESS PWB from the Right Side of the ESS Frame, carefully
ease the ESS PWB out of the ESS Frame.
Figure 5 Slide the ESS PWB from the Right Side of the ESS Frame
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.33 4-142 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
11. Refer to Figure 6, Slide the ESS PWB Out of the ESS Frame, to remove the ESS PWB Replacement
from the ESS Frame entirely.
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
CAUTION
When installing the ESS PWB (SFP), check that the Earth plate of the USB connector catches
in the ESS Box (SFP), PL18.9/19 as shown in the Figure 8, Earth plate of the USB Connec-
tor in the ESS Box below.
12. The ESS PWB removal is complete, Figure 7, Removal Complete with FCC Guides
Remaining In-place
1. Be sure to move the EMMC Card from the original ESS PWB to the new one.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC cables connected at the ESS PWB, the following
steps are to be observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC
cable, the FFC connector will allow insertion and lock on its own.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-143 REP 18.33
REP 18.34 Front USB Harness Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.9 Item 14
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the SFP top cover assembly.
2. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector. P/J1337.
3. Refer to Figure 1, release the front USB harness assembly, PL 18.9 Item 14, from the DC
harness guide, PL 18.11 Item 9, release one clamp, and the guides on the front USB har-
ness assembly, PL 18.11 Item 20.
Figure 9 Cable Perpendicular Insertion
4. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM3, silver, M4X6mm) and one screw (ST20, screw
for plastic silver, tapping, M3x8) to remove the front USB harness assembly.
5. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.33, REP 18.34 4-144 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.35 LVPS PWB (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.9 Item 16
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
Perform the steps that follow:
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-145 REP 18.34, REP 18.35
Figure 1 Remove the LVPS PWB (SFP High Model C600) Figure 2 Remove the LVPS PWB (SFP Low Model C500)
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.35 4-146 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.36 HVPS Guide Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LPH xerographic CRUM FFC, PL 8.1.
2. Refer to Figure 1, remove the HVPS toner cover, PL 18.9 Item 3, and remove one screw,
(SM18, silver, M3x6mm).
3. Refer to Figure 1, push the faston plug holders in the direction of the arrows to disconnect
the faston plugs from their terminals (P/J501, P/J502, T601).
4. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector (P/J100) from the HVPS guide assembly.
5. Refer to Figure 1, release the two hooks and remove the HVPS guide assembly in the
direction of the arrow.
Replacement
To reinstall a new HVPS guide assembly:
1. Connect the connector P/J100.
2. Place the HVPS guide assembly into its installed position making sure to insert the align-
ment tabs at the left edge of the board into their slots.
3. Slide the faston connector holders towards the board to reconnect the plugs.
NOTE: Make sure to attach the faston connectors (P/J501, P/J502, T601: K 1st supply
harness assembly, PL 18.10 Item 7, YMC 1st supply harness assembly, PL 18.10 Item 6,
and trans supply harness assembly, PL 18.10 Item 8, at the initial position as shown in
Figure 2.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-147 REP 18.36
REP 18.37 HVPS Toner Cover (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.10 Item 3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the drum cartridges Y, M, C, K, PL 8.1.
2. Refer to Figure 1, remove the HVPS toner cover, PL 18.10 Item 3.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.36, REP 18.37 4-148 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.38 Second Bias Transfer Roll Housing Kit (SFP) REP 18.39 AC Fusing Harness Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.10 Item 99 Parts List on PL 18.11 Item 2
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the Rear Door, PL 19.2 Item 99. 1. Remove the exit chute assembly, PL 17.1 Item 1 (C600) (C500).
2. Refer to Figure 1, remove the one screw (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the high voltage har- 2. Release one boss of the harness guide, and slightly release the harness guide with the
ness. 3. harnesses in the direction of the arrow.
3. Refer to Figure 1, release two hooks on the second bias transfer housing and remove the 4. Refer to Figure 1, remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the plate.
housing.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-149 REP 18.38, REP 18.39
Figure 3 Remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly (SFP)
7. Refer to Figure 4, remove the DC-CF fusing harness assembly and AC fusing harness
assembly from the fusing harness guide, then remove the DC-CF fusing harness assem-
bly from the AC fusing harness assembly.
Figure 2 Release the AC fusing harness assembly from the harness guides (SFP)
6. Remove one screw (SM18, silver, M3X6mm), and release three hooks to remove the DC-
CF fusing harness assembly, PL 18.11 Item 2, and AC fusing harness assembly with the
fusing harness guide.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.39 4-150 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.40 Rear-CF Interlock Harness Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the ESS PWB, PL 18.3 Item 3.
2. Remove the ESS Box, PL 18.3 Item 15.
3. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector (P/J292) from the LVPS PWB and release the
cable from the cable guide.
4. Refer to Figure 1, release the two hooks and remove the Rear-CF interlock harness
assembly.
Replacement
CAUTION
Make sure the Inlet Harness wiring is replaced following the factory-installed route.
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-151 REP 18.39, REP 18.40
REP 18.41 Side-CF Interlock Harness Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS PWB, PL 18.3 Item 6.
2. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.3 Item 13.
3. Refer to Figure 1, release the harness of the Side-CF IL harness assembly from the three
hooks.
4. Pull out the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from hole A.
6. Remove the waste link, PL 19.1 Item 13, and the waste link spring, PL 19.1 Item 14.
7. Refer to Figure 3, remove the screw (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the Side-CF interlock har-
ness assembly and remove the harness.
5. Refer to Figure 2, release the Side-CF I/L harness assembly from the sub fan duct, PL 4.1
Item 4.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.41 4-152 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 18.42 OPF-CF Harness Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.7
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS PWB, PL 18.3 Item 6.
2. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.3 Item 13.
3. Refer to Figure 1, unplug the connector (P/J800) and release the harness portion of the
OPF harness assembly from the four hooks of the harness guide.
4. Release the levers to remove the OPF-CF harness assembly.
5. Refer to Figure 1, squeeze the connector to release the connector from the socket and
remove the OPF-CF harness assembly.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-153 REP 18.41, REP 18.42
REP 18.43 Size Switch Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 18.11 Item 22
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the LVPS plate, PL 18.1 Item 13.
NOTE: In the following steps, be sure to note the harness routing to avoid damaging wires dur-
ing replacement.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.42, REP 18.43 4-154 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Figure 1 Remove the size switch assembly (SFP)
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid damaging wires during replacement. When replacing wire harnesses, use factory-
installed routes.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-155 REP 18.43
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 18.43 4-156 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 19.1 Front Cover Assembly (MFP and MFP_Tall) 4. Remove the front cover assembly, Figure 2:
a. Close the cover assy front to the position shown (1).
Parts List on PL 19.1 and PL 19.3
b. Remove the front cover assembly (2) while flexing the part (A) to release the bosses.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the IOT 550 Feed Tray Assembly, REP 9.1.
2. Remove the finisher or mailbox if installed.
3. Release the front cover assembly, Figure 1:
a. Open front cover assembly (1).
b. Release the boss of each link (L/R) from the front cover assembly (2).
c. Slide the links (L/R) into the printer (3).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-157 REP 19.1
REP 19.2 Right Front Cover (MFP and MFP_Tall) REP 19.3 Not used
Parts List on PL 19.1 and PL 19.3 This procedure is not used.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the right side front cover, Figure 1:
a. Press the hook release button (1).
b. Rotate the top of the right front cover in the direction of the arrow (2).
c. Remove the right front cover in the direction of the arrow (3).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.2, REP 19.3 4-158 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.4 Not used REP 19.5 Not used
This procedure is not used. This procedure is not used.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-159 REP 19.4, REP 19.5
REP 19.6 Not used REP 19.7 Left Side Cover (MFP and MFP_Tall)
This procedure is not used. Parts List on PL 19.2 and PL 19.4
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the IOT 550 feed tray assembly, REP 9.1.
2. Remove the main bypass tray (MSI) assembly, REP 13.6.
3. Remove the front cover assembly, PL 19.1.
4. Open the rear door, PL 19.2 Item 12.
5. Remove the left cover assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove six screws (1).
b. Release two bosses (2) at the front of the left side cover.
c. Release one hook (3).
d. Release one hook (4) and one boss (4), then remove the left side cover.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.6, REP 19.7 4-160 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.8 Left Side IIT Cover (MFP)
Parts List on PL 19.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. While pushing the part A, remove the COVER ICCR (PL19.1.40).
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-161 REP 19.7, REP 19.8
2. Refer to Figure 2, remove the left side IIT cover in the direction of the arrow REP 19.9 Second Bias Transfer Roller Assembly (MFP and
MFP_Tall)
Parts List on PL 19.2 and PL 19.4
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the rear door, PL 19.1 Item 99.
2. Squeeze the four latches and remove the 2nd BTR roll assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Figure 1 Remove the Second Bias Transfer Roller Assembly (MFP)
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.8, REP 19.9 4-162 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.10 Left Front Cover (MFP and MFP_Tall) Replacement
Parts List on PL 19.1 and PL 19.3 The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Prerequisite:
Remove the IOT 550 feed tray assembly, REP 9.1.
Remove the main bypass tray (MSI) assembly, REP 13.6.
Remove the front cover assembly, REP 19.1.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the left front cover, Figure 1:
a. Push the release button in the direction of the arrow (1) to release the front left cover
(2).
b. Disconnect (P/J512) (3), then remove the left front cover (2) with the tray led PWB,
PL 19.1 Item 24 and the tray shade cover, PL 19.1 Item 25.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-163 REP 19.10
REP 19.11 Not used REP 19.12 Right Side Cover Assembly (MFP and MFP_Tall)
This procedure is not used. Parts List on PL 19.1 and PL 19.3
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. 550 IOT cassette assembly, REP 9.1.
2. Main MSI tray assembly, REP 13.6.
3. Right front cover, REP 19.2.
4. Open the rear door, PL 19.2 Item 99.
5. Remove the right side cover assembly, Figure 1:
a. Remove four screws (1).
b. Release the bosses (2) on the front of the cover.
c. Release one hook (3) on the bottom of the cover.
d. Release two bosses (4) on the rear of the cover, the remove the cover.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.11, REP 19.12 4-164 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
Replacement REP 19.13 Top Cover (MFP)
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 19.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF assembly, REP 50.1.
2. Open the rear door, PL 19.2 Item 99.
3. Remove the top cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove eight screws (1).
b. Lift up and remove the top cover assembly (2).
NOTE: This includes the right IIT inner cover and left IIT inner cover.
Replacement
Replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-165 REP 19.12, REP 19.13
NOTE: When installing the top cover, check that the actuator full stuck and exit flapper L/R REP 19.14 Left Side Cover (MFP and MFP_Tall)
come out of the paper exit on the top cover.
Parts List on PL 19.2 and PL 19.4
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To prevent the printer from falling off the workbench in the following step, position the printer to
overhang the edge of the workbench as little as possible.
1. Remove the 550 IOT cassette assembly, REP 9.1.
2. Remove the main MSI tray assembly, REP 13.6.
3. Remove the front cover assembly, REP 19.1.
4. Remove the left front cover assembly, REP 19.10.
5. Open the rear door, PL 19.1 Item 99.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.13, REP 19.14 4-166 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
6. Remove the left side cover, Figure 1: Replacement
a. Remove six screws (1). The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
b. Release two bosses (2) on the front of the left side cover.
c. Release one hook (3) on the bottom of the left side cover.
d. Release one hook and one boss (4) at the rear of the left side cover, then remove the
left side cover (5).
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-167 REP 19.14
REP 19.15 Right Side Front Cover (SFP)
Parts List on PL 19.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the toner cover, PL 19.1 Item 1.
2. Remove the MSI tray, PL 13.2 Item 1.
3. Remove the IOT 550 cassette, PL 9.1 Item 1.
4. Refer to Figure 1, push and release button to release the hook at the top end of the right
side front cover.
5. Press in at the two bosses and remove the right side front cover in the direction of the
arrow.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.15 4-168 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.16 WIFI Cap (MFP and MFP_Tall) REP 19.17 ESS Window Assembly Kit (MFP and MFP_Tall)
Parts List on PL 19.2 and PL 19.4 Parts List on PL 19.2 and PL 19.4
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Release the hook, then remove the WIFI cap, Figure 1. 1. Perform the items that follow Figure 1:
1-1 Slide the lever as shown.
1-2 rotate the lever as shown.
2. Remove the ESS window assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-169 REP 19.16, REP 19.17
REP 19.18 Rear Cover Assembly (MFP and MFP_Tall) 3. Release two straps (1) and one spring (2), Figure 1:
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.18 4-170 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
5. Remove the rear cover assembly, Figure 2. REP 19.19 Front Inner Cover (MFP-Tall)
a. Remove two screws (1) connecting the right rear hinge assembly (2).
Parts List on PL 19.3
b. Remove the right rear hinge assembly (2) and the rear cover assembly while open-
ing the rear cover assembly. Removal
c. Remove the rear cover spring (3). WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the ICCR FIN Cover, PL 19.3 Item 40.
2. Remove the front inner cover, Figure 1:
a. Remove one screw (1).
b. Release tab (A), then pull at location (B) to remove the front inner cover (3).
Replacement
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-171 REP 19.18, REP 19.19
REP 19.20 Top Cover Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 19.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the 250 Sheet Cassette. PL 9.1
2. Remove the Main Bypass Tray Assembly. PL 13.1
3. Remove the Right Side Cover. PL 19.5 Item 8
4. Remove the Left Side Cover. PL 19.6 Item 1
5. Remove the Front Inner Cover. PL 19.5 Item 96
6. Remove the Left Rear Top Cover. PL 19.5 Item 9
7. Remove the Right Rear Top Cover. PL 19.5 Item 10
8. Open the Rear Cover.
9. Remove the UI Console. PL 1.2
10. Remove the three screws (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the Top Cover Assembly, then lift up
the cover. Figure 1.
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid pinching the UI harness between the Top Cover and the printer frame when installing the
Top Cover.
NOTE: When installing the Top Cover Assembly, ensure that the Exit Flapper extends out from
the Top Covers’ paper exit slots.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.20 4-172 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.22 Second Bias Transfer Roller Assembly (SFP) REP 19.24 WiFi Cap (SFP)
Parts List on PL 19.6 Parts List on PL 19.6
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the Rear Cover. 1. Refer to Figure 1, to release the lever in the direction of the arrow.
2. Refer to Figure 1, to release the four latches attaching the Second Bias Transfer Roller
and remove the roller assembly.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-173 REP 19.22, REP 19.24
REP 19.25 Rear Cover Assembly Kit (SFP) REP 19.32 Left Side Front Cover (MFP-Tall)
Parts List on PL 19.6 Parts List on PL 19.3
Removal Prerequisite:
WARNING Perform the toner cover assembly removal procedure PL 19.3 Item 95.
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause Removal
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. WARNING
1. Remove the right side cover. Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
2. Open the Rear Cover. tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
3. Refer to Figure 1, to remove the ends of the two rear cover straps from the rear cover. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
4. close the rear cover. 1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
5. Refer to Figure 1, to remove the two screws (silver, M3x6mm) attaching the right rear 1-1 Push down the catch to release the left front cover.
hinge. 1-2 Rotate the left front cover as shown.
CAUTION
Do not damage the LED harness assembly when performing the next step.
1-3 Remove the left front cover.
2. Refer Disconnect the connector, P/J521.
6. Remove the right rear hinge and the rear cover assembly from the printer while opening
the cover.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.25, REP 19.32 4-174 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.33 Not Used
This procedure is not used.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-175 REP 19.32, REP 19.33
REP 19.35 Top Cover (MFP-Tall)
Parts List on PL 19.3
Prerequisite:
Perform the USB front harness assembly.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.2 Item 99.
2. Remove the OPT blind cover, Figure 1:
Replacement
When installing the top cover, check that the full stack actuator and left/right exit flapper come
out of the paper exit on the top cover.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.35 4-176 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.43 Not Used REP 19.45 Right Side Front Cover (SFP)
This procedure is not used. Parts List on PL 19.5
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the toner cover assembly.
2. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 1:
2-1 Press the hook.
2-2 Rotate the right front cover as shown.
2-3 Remove the right front cover.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-177 REP 19.43, REP 19.45
REP 19.47 Left Side Front Cover (SFP)
Parts List on PL 19.5
Prerequisite:
Perform the toner cover assembly removal procedure.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
1-1 Push down the catch to release the left front cover.
1-2 Rotate the left front cover as shown.
CAUTION
Do not damage the LED harness assembly when performing the next step.
1-3 Remove the left front cover.
2. Refer Disconnect the connector, P/J521.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.45, REP 19.47 4-178 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.48 Toner Cover Assembly (SFP)
Parts List on PL 19.5
Prerequisite:
Perform the WiFi cap removal procedure, PL 19.5 Item 95.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the Toner Cover Assembly, Figure 1.
2. Perform the items that follow:
2-1 Push the hook as shown.
2-2 Remove the toner cover assembly.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Figure 1 Toner cover assembly removal
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-179 REP 19.47, REP 19.48
REP 19.49 Right Side Cover Assembly (SFP) 6-1 Release one boss in the middle edge.
6-2 Release one boss on the bottom edge.
Parts List on PL 19.5
6-3 Remove the right side cover assembly.
Prerequisites:
Remove the right side front cover.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the waste box cover on the right side, press the tab and remove the waste toner
assembly, Figure 1.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.49 4-180 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 19.50 Top Cover (SFP) 3-2 Remove the top cover assembly.
• UI console assembly.
• UI access door.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.2 Item 99.
2. Remove the OPT blind cover, Figure 1:
Replacement
When installing the top cover, check that the actuator full stuck and exit flapper L/R come out of
the paper exit on the top cover.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-181 REP 19.50
REP 19.51 Left Side Cover (SFP)
Parts List on Pl 19.6
Prerequisites:
Left front cover PL 19.5 Item 95.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
CAUTION
To prevent the printer from falling off the workbench in the following step, position the printer to
overhang the edge of the workbench as little as possible.
1. Open the rear cover assembly, PL 19.1 Item 99.
2. Remove four screws SM 18
3. Release the items that follow, Figure 1:
3-1 One hook.
3.2 One hook.
3-3 One boss.
4. Release one hook.
5. Perform the items that follow:
5-1 Release one hook.
5.2 Release one boss.
5-3 Remove the left side cover.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.51 4-182 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
Replacement REP 19.54 WIFI Cap (SFP)
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 19.6
Prerequisite:
Perform the ESS window assembly, PL 19.6 Item 16.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Release the hook and remove the WIFI cap, Figure 1.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-183 REP 19.51, REP 19.54
REP 19.55 ESS Window Assembly Kit (SFP) REP 19.56 Rear Cover Assembly (MFP)
Parts List on PL 19.6 Parts List on PL 19.6
Prerequisite: Prerequisite:
Perform the MSI main tray assembly, PL 13.2 Item 1. Perform the right side cover assembly, PL 19.5 Item 97.
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1: 1. Open the rear cover assembly.
1-1 Slide the lever as shown. 2. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1:
1-2 rotate the lever as shown. 2-1 Raise the lever.
2. Remove the ESS window assembly. 2-2 Remove the relay cover.
2-3 Disconnect the connector, P/J296.
3. Release two rear cover straps
Replacement
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.55, REP 19.56 4-184 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
Figure 2 Remove the rear cover assembly (SFP)
Replacement
The replacement procedure is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP 4-185 REP 19.56
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 19.56 4-186 Xerox® VersaLink® B600 Family MFP
REP 20.1 Cover LH C 4. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
4-1 Release the two tabs.
Parts List on PL 20.1
4-2 Remove the cover LH C.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to the Hardware Kit.
1. Remove the mailbox from the IOT, then turn the mailbox upside down.
2. Remove two screws SM20, Figure 1.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Mailbox 4-187 REP 20.1
REP 20.2 Cover RH C and Cover Assembly Staple 4-1 Release the two tabs.
4-2 Remove the cover RH C.
Parts List on PL 20.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
1. Remove the mailbox from the IOT, then turn the mailbox upside down.
2. Remove two screws SM20, Figure 1.
CAUTION
Replacement
Use care during the next Step as the covers are no longer firmly attached to the frame and may
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
easily fall off and get damaged.
3. Turn the mailbox right side up.
4. Perform the items that follow, Figure 2:
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 20.2 4-188 Xerox Mailbox
REP 20.3 Cover Top C REP 20.4 MBX PWB
Parts List on PL 20.2 Parts List on PL 20.1
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit. NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer Hardware Kit.
1. Remove the cover LH C, REP 20.1. 1. Remove the cover LH C, REP 20.1.
2. Remove the cover RH C/cover assembly staple, REP 20.2. 2. Remove the cover RH C/cover assembly staple, REP 20.2.
3. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1: 3. Remove the cover top C, REP 20.3.
3-1 Use a flat blade screwdriver and release the two tabs. 4. Release the harness assembly vertical sensor from the clamp.
3-2 Remove the cover top C. 5. Remove the items that follow, Figure 1:
5-1 Two screws, one SM18 and one ST20.
5-2 The bracket RH
6. Remove the items that follow, Figure 1:
6-1. One screw, SM18.
6-2. One screw, ST20.
6-3. The bracket LH
7. Disconnect all connectors from the PWB MBX, Figure 1.
8. Remove the items that follow, Figure 1:
8-1 Four screws, ST20.
8-2 MBX PWB.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Mailbox 4-189 REP 20.3, REP 20.4
REP 20.5 LVPS PWB
Parts List on PL 20.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 20.4, REP 20.5 4-190 Xerox Mailbox
Replacement REP 20.6 Motor Assembly
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 20.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Mailbox 4-191 REP 20.5, REP 20.6
REP 20.7 Solenoid Assembly Gate
Parts List on PL 20.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer Hardware Kit.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 20.6, REP 20.7 4-192 Xerox Mailbox
Replacement REP 20.8 Tray Assembly
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 20.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Mailbox 4-193 REP 20.7, REP 20.8
Figure 2 3rd tray assembly
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 20.8 4-194 Xerox Mailbox
Figure 3 2nd tray assembly Figure 4 1st tray assembly
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Mailbox 4-195 REP 20.8
REP 20.9 Tray assembly Bottom 3. The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
Replacement
NOTE: Perform the steps the follow before installing the new spare tray assembly into the mail-
box:
1. Compare the new spare tray to the old spare tray. It may be necessary to transfer one or
two parts from the old assembly to the new assembly.
2. Check that the new spare tray has a label in it. It may be necessary to affix a label that is
provided to the new tray assembly.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 20.9 4-196 Xerox Mailbox
REP 20.10 Bin Assembly Gate Solenoid
Parts List on PL 20.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, Hardware Kit.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Mailbox 4-197 REP 20.10
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 20.10 4-198 Xerox Mailbox
REP 21.1 Cover LH C CAUTION
Use care during the next step as the covers are no longer firmly attached to the frame and may
Parts List on PL 21.1
easily fall off.
Removal 3. Turn the finisher right side up.
WARNING 4. Perform the steps that follow, Figure 2:
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from 4-1. Use a flat blade screwdriver to release the two tabs.
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
4-2. Remove the cover LH C.
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Finisher 4-199 REP 21.1
Replacement REP 21.2 Cover RH C
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure. Parts List on PL 21.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Finisher 4-201 REP 21.2, REP 21.3
REP 21.4 PWB GPF A4 Finisher
Parts List on PL 21.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Finisher 4-203 REP 21.5
REP 21.6 Motor Assembly
Parts List on PL 21.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Finisher 4-205 REP 21.7
REP 21.8 Cover Lower C REP 21.9 Motor Assembly Stepping
Parts List on PL 21.1 Parts List on PL 21.1
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit. NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
1. Remove the finisher, REP TBD. Turn the finisher upside down. 1. Remove the cover LH C, REP 21.1.
2. Perform the items that follow, Figure 1: 2. Remove the LVPS, REP 21.8.
2-1 Press the release lever. 3. Remove the components that follow, Figure 1:
2-2 Remove the cover lower C. 3-1 One screw, ST20.
3-2 Plate ground LH bracket.
4. Remove the components that follow, Figure 1:
4-1 One E-ring.
4-2 Gear.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Finisher 4-207 REP 21.9
REP 21.10 Stapler Assembly
Parts List on PL 21.2
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine. Refer to GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from
the customer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can
cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
Replacement
The replacement is the reverse of the removal procedure.
NOTE: For additional information about screws and fasteners, refer to Hardware Kit.
5. Using gear rack, level the tray lifting gear rack while turning gear, until the teeth of the two
gears mesh and lock via the motor to stop the gear rack from lowering.
6. Reinstall the E-ring on gear.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox Finisher 4-209 REP 21.11
Repairs-Adjustments May 2017 Initial IssueRevised BUS Update: 9 July 2018
REP 21.11 4-210 Xerox Finisher
REP 50.1 DADF Assembly (MFP Std. and MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 50.1
Removal
MFP Std. C605
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the IOT 550 cassette assembly, PL 19.1 Item 1.
2. Remove the main MSI tray assembly, PL 13.2 Item 1.
3. Remove the ESS window assembly kit, PL 19.2 Item 13.
4. Remove the WiFi cap, PL 19.2 Item 16.
5. Remove the L front cover, PL 19.1 Item 22.
6. Remove the L side cover, PL 19.2 Item 1.
7. Remove the top ESS plate, PL 18.1 Item 18.
CAUTION
In the following step, engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of
the release lever will break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the
PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly press open the release
lever no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connec-
tor as shown in the inset of Figure 1, Disconnect the DADF harness and FFC.
1. Refer to Figure 1, following the caution above, release the FFC (P/J1371) coming from the
DADF, disconnect (P/J1377), and the ground wire from the ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 3.
Figure 1 Disconnect the DADF harness and FFC (MFP Std.)
2. Refer to Figure 1, release the hook and remove the FFC Cover from the IIT Assembly.
3. Refer to Figure 1, remove the DADF harness out of its harness guide and up through the
IIT Assembly.
a. Fold the DADF harness connector up against the wires.
b. Orient the harness connector to face the front of the printer.
c. Pass the harness up through the IIT Assembly.
4. Refer to Figure 2, lift the DADF assembly straight up from the IIT assembly in the direction
of the arrow.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-211 REP 50.1
6. Remove the L side cover, PL 19.2 Item 1.
7. Remove the top ESS plate, PL 18.1 Item 18.
CAUTION
In the following step, engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of
the release lever will break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the
PWB.
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly press open the release
lever no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connec-
tor as shown in the inset of Figure 3, Disconnect the DADF harness and FFC.
1. Refer to Figure 3, following the caution above, release the FFC (P/J1371) coming from the
DADF, disconnect (P/J1377), and the ground wire from the ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 3.
Removal
MFP Tall. C605_Tall
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
Figure 3 Disconnect the DADF harness and FFC (MFP Tall)
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
2. Refer to Figure 3, release the hook and remove the FFC Cover from the IIT Assembly.
1. Remove the IOT 550 cassette assembly, PL 19.1 Item 1.
3. Refer to Figure 4, remove the DADF harness out of its harness guide and up through the
2. Remove the main MSI tray assembly, PL 13.2 Item 1. IIT Assembly.
3. Remove the ESS window assembly kit, PL 19.2 Item 13. a. Fold the DADF harness connector up against the wires.
4. Remove the WiFi cap, PL 19.2 Item 16. b. Orient the harness connector to face the front of the printer.
5. Remove the L front cover, PL 19.1 Item 22.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 50.1 4-212 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
c. Pass the harness up through the IIT Assembly. Replacement
4. Refer to Figure 4, lift the DADF assembly straight up from the IIT assembly in the direction CAUTION
of the arrow.
Avoid pinching wires when installing the DADF harness and FFC. Be sure to follow the harness
routes as shown in Figure 5.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-213 REP 50.1
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC connected at the ESS PWB, the following steps are to be REP 50.2 IIT Assembly
observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC connec-
tor will allow insertion and lock on its own. Parts List on PL 50.1
1. Slip the core down the FFC cable.
Removal
MFP Std. C605
2. To ease installation and ensure proper alignment of the FFC cable, bend the blue “grip
tab” 90 degrees perpendicular to the FFC.
3. Referring to Figure 6 and Figure 7, Proper FFC Cable Insertion, grasp the grip tab of the
WARNING
FFC cable placing the back, or non-conductive Side, of the FFC cable against the edge of Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
the connector and centered to the connector. tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the IOT 550 cassette assembly, PL 19.1 Item 1.
2. Remove the main MSI tray assembly, PL 13.2 Item 1.
3. Open the rear door.
4. Remove the ESS window assembly kit, PL 19.2 Item 13.
5. Remove the WiFi cap, PL 19.2 Item 16.
6. Remove the L front cover, PL 19.1 Item 22.
7. Remove the L side cover, PL 19.2 Item 1.
8. Remove the Cover Front IIT, PL 50.1.19.
9. Remove the UI inner cover, PL 1.1 Item 2.
10. Remove the top ESS plate, PL 18.1 Item 18.
11. Refer to Figure 1, remove 2 screws connecting the UI plate to the scanner and three
Figure 6 Cable Perpendicular Insertion screws in the UI plate.
4. Using the grip tab bent at 90 degrees, firmly push the FFC cable into the connector until
fully seated. The latch of the connector will “click” when fully seated, locking the FFC in-
place.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 50.1, REP 50.2 4-214 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Figure 2 Disconnect the harnesses and two FFCs (MFP Std.)
Figure 1 UI plate screw locations
Removal
CAUTION MFP Tall C605_Tall
In the following step, engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of
the release lever will break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the WARNING
PWB. Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly press open the release
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
lever no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connec-
tor as shown in the inset of Figure 2, Disconnect the harnesses and two FFCs. 1. Remove the finisher or mailbox, if installed.
2. Remove the IOT 550 cassette assembly, PL 19.1 Item 1.
12. Refer to Figure 2, following the caution above, release the 2 FFC cables (P/J1370 and P/
3. Remove the main MSI tray assembly, PL 13.2 Item 1.
J1371) and disconnect (P/J1372, P/J1373, P/J1374, P/J1377) from the ESS PWB.
4. Open the rear door.
13. Refer to Figure 2, remove two screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to release the ground har-
nesses from the ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 3. 5. Remove the ESS window assembly kit, PL 19.2 Item 13.
14. Release three clamps and five push-ties. 6. Remove the WiFi cap, PL 19.2 Item 16.
15. Refer to Figure 2, remove eight screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the scanner 7. Remove the L front cover, PL 19.1 Item 22.
assembly PL 50.1 Item 13 in the direction of the arrow. 8. Remove the L side cover, PL 19.2 Item 1.
9. Remove the exit top finisher cover, if installed, PL 19.3 Item 50.
10. Remove the R side finisher cover, PL 19.3 Item 32.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-215 REP 50.2
11. Remove the L side finisher cover, PL 19.4 Item 2. CAUTION
12. Remove the SUB L side finisher cover, PL 19.3 Item 43. In the following step, engage the lever enough to release the FFC only. Over-engagement of
13. Remove the rear finisher cover, PL 19.4 Item 3. the release lever will break the lever destroying the lock mechanism forcing replacement of the
PWB.
14. Remove the inner rear finisher cover, PL 19.3 Item 31.
15. Remove the IIT front cover, PL 50.1 Item 19. NOTE: When engaging the release lever on the FFC connector, slightly press open the release
16. Remove the UI inner cover, PL 1.1 Item 2. lever no more than 15 degrees. Hold the lever while gently removing the FFC from the connec-
tor as shown in the inset of Figure 4, Disconnect the harnesses and two FFCs.
17. Remove the top ESS plate, PL 18.1 Item 18.
18. Refer to Figure 3, remove the 2 screws that connect the UI plate to the scanner, and the 19. Refer to Figure 4, following the caution above, release the 2 FFC cables (P/J1370 and P/
three screws in the bottom of the UI plate. J1371) and disconnect (P/J1372, P/J1373, P/J1374, P/J1377) from the ESS PWB.
20. Refer to Figure 4, remove two screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to release the ground har-
nesses from the ESS PWB, PL 18.1 Item 3.
21. Release three clamps and five push-ties.
22. Refer to Figure 4, remove eight screws (SM18, silver, M3X6mm) to remove the scanner
assembly PL 50.1 Item 13 in the direction of the arrow.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 50.2 4-216 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
Replacement
CAUTION
Avoid pinching wires when installing the DADF harness and FFC. Be sure to follow the harness
routes as shown in Figure 7.
NOTE: To ensure integrity of the FFC connected at the ESS PWB, the following steps are to be
observed. Do not attempt to engage the release lever to insert the FFC cable, the FFC connec-
tor will allow insertion and lock on its own.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-217 REP 50.2
REP 50.3 Left and Right Counterbalance Assemblies REP 50.4 Platen Cushion Assembly (MFP Std. and MFP
(Hinges) (MFP Std. and MFP Tall) Tall)
Parts List on PL 50.1 Parts List on PL 50.1 Item 12
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Remove the DADF, PL 50.1 Item 1, from the scanner. 1. Open the document cover.
2. Refer to Figure 1, rest the DADF on the work surface as shown. 2. Remove the platen cushion assembly, PL 50.1 Item 12.
3. Refer to Figure 1, remove eight screws (silver, tapping, m3x8), remove the left and right 3. Clean any residue adhesive from the DADF lid left behind.
hinges. 4. A mild cleaning solution such as soap and water or glass cleaner may assist cleaning by
softening up the adhesive residue.
Replacement
NOTE: When installing the platen cushion assembly, arrange the platen cushion assembly as
shown in Figure 1.
1. Align the platen cushion assembly to the platen glass so that the DADF chute door is
aligned to the DADF chute of the DADF lid, (left side).
2. Carefully lower the DADF lid onto the platen cushion assembly.
3. Gently but firmly, press the DADF lid to the scanner to adhere the platen cushion assem-
bly to the DADF lid.
4. Lift the DADF lid and inspect the platen cushion assembly checking for any gaps between
the adhesive and the lid area. Close any gaps between the platen cushion assembly and
the DADF lid by pressing the platen cushion assembly to the lid.
Replacement
CAUTION
The Hinges are keyed and must be installed in their specified locations.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 50.3, REP 50.4 4-218 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 50.5 Left IIT Cover (MFP Std. and MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 50.1 Item 14
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1 (MFP Std.), Figure 2 (MFP Tall), release the hook on the rear side of the
left IIT cover, and remove the left IIT cover.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-219 REP 50.4, REP 50.5
REP 50.6 Left IIT Cap (MFP Std. and MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 50.1 Item 15
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1, release the hook on the rear side of the left IIT cover, and remove the
left IIT cover, PL 50.1 Item 14.
2. Refer to Figure 1, release the hook on the right of the left IIT cap and remove the left IIT
cap.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 50.5, REP 50.6 4-220 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
REP 50.7 DADF Actuator (MFP Std. and MFP Tall) REP 50.8 IIT Front Cover (MFP Std. and MFP Tall)
Parts List on PL 50.1 Item 14 Parts List on PL 50.1 Item 19
Removal Removal
WARNING WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus- Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury. death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1, open the DADF Upper Feeder Assembly. 1. Refer to Figure 1, release the hook and remove the front IIT cover.
2. Release the two bosses at the ends of the DADF Actuator by slightly bending the Actua-
tor, and remove it.
08/2017 Repairs-Adjustments
Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer 4-221 REP 50.7, REP 50.8
REP 50.9 DADF Feed Roll Kit
Parts List on PL 50.1
Removal
WARNING
Switch off the electricity to the machine, GP 4. Disconnect the power cord from the cus-
tomer supply while performing tasks that do not need electricity. Electricity can cause
death or injury. Moving parts can cause injury.
1. Refer to Figure 1, open the DADF Upper Feeder Assembly.
CAUTION
In the following steps, avoid breaking the DADF Feed Roller and related hooks. Do not bend
the hooks excessively. Carefully align the DADF Feed Roller with its mating features.
2. Refer to Figure 1, rotate the hook of the DADF Feed Roller and release the boss.
3. Remove the DADF Feed Roller.
4. Refer to Figure 2, remove the Separator Cover Assembly in the direction of the arrow.
5. Remove the DADF Separator Spring.
Repairs-Adjustments 08/2017
REP 50.9 4-222 Xerox B600/605/610/615 Printer
ADJ 1 Cleaning the LPH 4. Check that the cleaning pad is correctly installed on the cleaning wand. If necessary
obtain a clean pad. Figure 2.
Purpose
NOTE: Squeeze the tabs together to if it is necessary to release the cleaning pad from
Clean the LPH as a standard part of service. Cleaning the LPH provides consistent image
quality. the wand.
Clean
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
1. Switch off the machine, unplug the cord from the power, GP 4.
2. Open the front door.
3. Remove the cleaning wand from inside the front door, Figure 1.
Refer to:
• Cleaning the Scanner
• Cleaning the feed rollers on the DADF
Procedure
Cleaning the Scanner
WARNING
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
1. Remove any paper from the document feeder tray, and the document output tray.
2. Open the document cover.
3. Slightly dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with water.
NOTE: For best results in the following step, use Xerox® Glass Cleaner to remove marks and
streaks.
4. Clean the document glass, the side-1 scanning area (to the left of the of the document
glass) and the white strip, Figure 1. Figure 2 Opening the second-side scanning access cover
CAUTION
In the following step, to prevent damage to the film around the glass, do not press heavily on
the mirrored glass.
7. Using a soft cloth moistened with water, wipe the mirrored glass, the white-plastic strip,
and the rollers, Figure 3. If dirt is difficult to remove, moisten a soft cloth with a small
amount of neutral detergent. Then wipe the printer parts dry with a soft cloth.
NOTE: If the feed rollers get stained with toner or debris, they can cause stains on the docu-
ments. To remove the stains, use a soft lint-free cloth dampened with a neutral detergent or
water.
2. Wipe the feed rollers with a dry, soft, lint-free cloth or paper towel until the rollers are
clean, Figure 4.
14 - Duplex
PL 14.1 Duplex................................................................................................................ 5-22
15 - Registration
PL 15.1 Registration (1/2) ............................................................................................... 5-23
PL 15.2 Registration (2/2) ............................................................................................... 5-24
17 - Exit
Diagnostics
dC118 Jam Counter ........................................................................................................ 6-55
dC120 Failure Counter.................................................................................................... 6-55
dC122 Fault History ........................................................................................................ 6-56
dC125 Active Faults ........................................................................................................ 6-56
dC126 System Registration Adjustment ......................................................................... 6-57
dC131 NVM Read / Write................................................................................................ 6-58
dC132 Device ID / Billing Data........................................................................................ 6-59
NOTE: In Sleep mode, the touch screen is powered off and the Power/Wake button
flashes.
Table 11 Weight and dimensions: Optional caster with cabinet Table 12 Weight and dimensions: caster stand (with HCF)
Width (min) 652mm (25.7 in.) Width (min) 652mm (25.7 in.)
Width (max) 802mm (31.6 in.) Width (max.) 802mm (31.6 in)
Depth 743mm (29.3 in.) Depth 743mm (29.3 in.)
Height 336mm (13.4 in.) Height 459mm (18.1 in.)
Weight (cabinet) 16.6kg (36.6 lb.) Weight (HCF) 19.7kg (43.4 lb.)
Weight caster base 8.5kg (18.8 lb.) Weight (caster base) 8.5kg (18.8 lb.)
Figure 8 Finisher (B605/B615_Tall MFP) Figure 10 Mailbox (B605/ B615 MFP Tall)
Table 13 Weight and dimensions: finisher Table 14 Weights and dimensions: mailbox
Width 477mm (18.8 in.) Width 411mm (16.2 in.)
Depth 450mm (17.7 in.) Depth 450mm (17.7 in.)
Height 248mm (9.8 in.) Height 248mm (9.8 in.)
Weight 6.8kg (15 lb.) Weight 5.2kg (11.5 lb.)
Procedure
NOTE: The close proximity of cables to moving parts makes proper routing essential. If com-
ponents are removed, any cables disturbed by the procedure must be restored as close as
possible to their original positions. Before removing any component from the machine, note the
cable routing that will be affected.
1. Check the drive voltage when the component control code for the motor is entered. If the
drive voltage is present at the motor, but the motor does not turn, install a new motor. If
the drive voltage is not present, go to step 2.
2. Check that the drive voltage is correct at the output pins of the driver PWB when the com-
ponent control code for the motor is entered. If the drive voltage is present, check the wir-
ing and connectors to the motor. If the drive voltage is not present, check the power to the
driver PWB. If the power to the PWB is good, install a new driver PWB.
Initial Actions NOTE: Figure 1 shows an interlock switch actuated by the closing of a door.
WARNING Initial Actions
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need WARNING
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
injury.
electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
1. For a clutch, check that the shafts, gears, rolls etc., associated with the clutch are free to injury.
rotate, clean and lubricated where applicable.
Manually check that the switch operates. Ensure that the magnet or other actuator has enough
2. For a solenoid, check that the solenoid is free to actuate and that the mechanisms associ-
mechanical movement to operate the switch.
ated with the solenoid are free to move.
Procedure NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Go to the wiring diagram associated with the RAP for the correct information.
NOTE: The voltages, PJ numbers, pin numbers and PWB names shown are an example only.
Go to the wiring diagram associated with the RAP for the correct information. Procedure
NOTE: When a solenoid is energized in diagnostics, movement is seen. When a clutch is ener- 1. Enter dc330 diagnostics and enable the component control code for the switch to test.
gized in diagnostics, the sound of the clutch action is heard. If possible, run the motor con- Actuate the switch. If the display changes, the switch operates correctly. If the display
nected to the clutch to confirm when the clutch is energized does not change, perform the following steps.
2. Inspect the mechanism intended to actuate the switch. Adjust, repair or install a new part
1. Enter the dC330 output code for the clutch or solenoid. If the clutch or solenoid does not
as needed if it is not actuating the switch.
energize, continue with step 2.
3. Disconnect the switch and measure the resistance between the two connector pins. If it
2. Refer to Figure 1 as an example. Disconnect PJ17, check for +24VDC at pin 1 on the wir-
does not change from infinite to 0 ohms as the switch is actuated, install a new switch. If
ing side of the connector, If the voltage is correct, install a new solenoid or clutch. the resistance changes correctly, go to the next step.
3. Reconnect PJ17, enter the dC330 output code for the clutch or solenoid, while measuring 4. Check the continuity of the wire harness between the switch and its control PWB. If open,
the voltage between pin 1 and ground. If the voltage does not change when the code is
repair or install a new harness.
entered, install a new PWB.
5. If the switch and wire harness have tested good, install a new PWB that the switch is con-
4. If the fault is intermittent, perform the actions that follow:
nected to.
a. Check the wiring. Repair or replace as necessary.
b. Operate the clutch or solenoid under normal running conditions. If the clutch or sole-
noid operates intermittently or with hesitation, install new parts.
c. Check that the clutch or solenoid has enough drive to operate the mechanism to
which it is attached; if necessary, install a new clutch or solenoid.
NOTE: Use the IPv4 address for the Local Area Connection, not the address listed under
Wireless Ethernet Connection (if enabled in the laptop).
NOTE: If the PWS has a wireless Ethernet card/adapter installed, Windows will not use the
wired Ethernet port by default until either the PWS is rebooted or the wireless Ethernet card is
temporarily disabled. If unsure how to disable/enable the wireless Ethernet card, restart the
PWS after setting the IP address.
For W7:
1. Open the Control Panel.
2. Select Network Sharing Center.
3. Select Change Adaptor Settings in the upper left corner of the Control Panel.
4. Right-click on Local Area Connection, then select Properties.
5. On the Networking tab (for local area connection), click on Internet Protocol Version 4
(TCP/IPv4), then select Properties.
6. Select Use the following IP address and enter an IP address similar to the printer to
manually set the PWS IP address and subnet mask to match the printer’s IP configuration
settings.
7. Click OK twice and exit Network Connections and return to Creating the Clone File.
Figure 1 Clear the media path and output tray (SFP shown)
Use a breakout box to measure voltages (use the machine chassis as ground). Refer to the • PCL Font List
Fax 101 training kit 701P50355 (GSN Library #77387) for instructions. Check the following con- • Demonstration Print
ditions: • Startup Page
• Ground continuity Configuration Report
• Line voltage: -20 to -50VDC The Configuration Report lists the current state of system configuration parameters including
• Loop current: 15 to 95 mA DC installed options and network settings.
• Ring signal: 50 to 90VAC
Billing Summary Report
• Ring-ground and tip-ground: <1VAC
The Billing Summary Report lists Device Information, Billing Meter impression counters (for
NOTE: If a line quality or incorrect voltage is found, it is the customers responsibility to resolve customers on billing meter supplies plans only) and Sheet Count by Paper Type.
the problem.
Supplies Usage
The Supplies Usage report includes the current status of printer consumables and routine
maintenance items. Installation dates and replacement part numbers are listed.
Demonstration Print
This report shows a brief synopsis of the device.
Startup Page
This report lists device type, software versions, enabled protocols and mobile connectivity.
10. Replace any components or consumables that are known to be a frequent cause of the
problem, taking into consideration, repair cost and time required. If the suspected item is
WARNING
inexpensive, can be installed quickly, and has a high probability of resolving the problem, Do not attempt to remove or lift the following component with less than 2 people. The
then it is reasonable to replace it. component is very heavy and requires at least 2 people to lift or remove it. Any attempt
11. Leave a detailed record of actions taken in the service log, and recommended next steps. to remove or lift the component with less than 2 people could result in serious personal
injury.
CAUTION
Always move the printer separately from the optional tray unless the optional stand is installed.
Lift the printer firmly by gripping the recessed areas on both sides of the printer. Never lift the
printer by gripping any other areas.
When moving the printer or removing heavy modules, observe the following:
1. Locate a suitable stable surface to support the module after removal.
2. The support surface height is between 750mm and 1000mm (30" and 39").
3. Check there are no hazards or obstacles between the printer and support surface.
CAUTION
If the optional Productivity Kit (HD) is not installed, ensure that the Ready LED is off before you
turn off the printer. The data in the memory is cleared when the printer is turned off.
4. Switch off the machine GP 4 and disconnect the power cord and other cables from the
back of the printer.
5. If the output tray extension is extended, close it Figure 1. Remove any paper or other
media from the output tray Figure 2.
6. Remove the paper from the paper tray, Figure 1. Keep the paper wrapped and away from
humidity and dirt.
Table 2 Total installation space requirements (SFP) Table 3 SFP with optional finisher
Width 870mm (34.3 in.) Width 870mm (34.3 in.)
Depth 1322mm (49.8 in.) Depth 1322mm (52 in.)
Height 676mm (26.6 in.) Height 699mm (21.8 in.)
Elevation
For optimum performance, use the printer at elevations below 3100 m (10,170 ft.).
The printer should be stored and operated under the environmental conditions shown in Table Table 2 Safety / Environment conditions
1:
100-127V M/C 220-240V M/C
Table 1 Operating environment Safety Standard UL60950-1, CSA 22.2 60950 IEC60950-1 / EN60950-1
Characteristic Specification Laser Safety Standard FDA21CFR Chapter 1, Subchap- IEC60825-1 Amendment 1 +
Installation Temperature / Installation temperature and humidity on the condition without ter J, Section 1010, 1040 Amendment 2 / EN60825-1
Amendment 1 + Amendment 2
Humidity condensation is as follows.
Class 1 Laser Product
Operating: 10-32degC (50-90degF), 15-85%RH (no condensation)
Storage: Minus 20-40degC (minus 4-104degF), 5-85%RH (no con- EMI FCC Part15 Subpart B, Class A EN55022:2006, Class A
densation)
Installation Altitude 0 to 3,100m (0 - 10,170 ft) Noise Levels
Installation Horizontally Longitudinal levelness of table surface on which the printer is The printer’s audible noise levels during operation and standby are shown in Table 3(B600/
installed B610) and Table 4(B605/B615/B615_Tall)
Longitudinal: 1 degree or under
Lateral: 1 degree or under Table 3 Noise levels (B600 and B615)
Storage Temperature of a The guaranteed period of the toner cartridge before unpacked is as
Operating Mode Sound Power (B) Sound Pressure (dB)
Toner Cartridge follows:
Normal conditions: 24 months under 5 to 32degC, 15 to 85%RH. Running 7.41B 56.9dB
Harsh conditions: 1 month under -20 to 0degC and 35 to 40degC, 5 Standby 5.30B 36.3dB
to 15%RH and 80 to 90%RH.
The storage altitude shall be 0 to 3,100m. Can be extended to 0 to Table 4 Noise levels (B605/B615/B615_Tall)
15,000m when shipped by air.
Operating Mode Sound Power (B) Sound Pressure (dB)
(Provided that the cargo bay is pressurized to 70.9275Kpa or
higher. Running 7.50B 58.5dB
Acoustic Noise Operation: 56.9-58.5 dB Standby 5.80B 40.2dB
Sound Pressure (Deci- Standby or Ready: 36.3-40.2 dB
bels)
Elevation
For optimum performance, use the printer at elevations below 3100 m (10,170 ft.).
Environmental Specifications
Temperature
Standard Configuration
• Operating temperature: 5–32°C (41–90°F)
• Optimum temperature: 15–28°C (59–82°F)
Relative Humidity
NOTE:
– Under extreme environmental conditions, such as 10°C and 85% relative humidity,
printing defects can occur due to condensation in the printer.
– Print quality can be affected when operating near the limits for both temperature and
humidity.
NOTE: In order to complete the next few steps, it may be necessary to log in as Admin. Procedure
2. From the Home page, click on Details to the right of the supplies heading. WARNING
3. The left side of the screen displays selections for several features. Scroll to the bottom Isolate the machine from the electrical supply while performing tasks that do not need
and select Supplies Plan. electricity. Refer to GP 4. Electricity can cause death or injury. Moving parts can cause
injury.
NOTE: Enter the passcode within 500 page counts of when it was issued, or it will not be
1. Select dC330 Component Control.
valid.
2. Remove the toner cartridge.
4. Click Plan Conversion to access the Total Impressions screen.
3. Close all covers or defeat the interlock switches.
5. Call Field Engineering or your NTS and provide the device serial number and total
4. Select code 041-001 for the 24VDC low voltage power supply.
impressions that are displayed on the Supplies Plan screen. You will receive a 6 character
5. Select the code for the toner dispenser motor and listen to the gear movement. It should
Plan Conversion code.
be smooth and relatively quiet. You can also look at the toner gear movement on the left
6. Enter the passcode string provided in 5 and click on Apply. side of the machine where the toner is dispensed.
6. If there is clicking or chattering, the problem is related to the toner dispenser assembly.
7. Turn off the toner dispenser motor and the low voltage power supply.
8. Select Close to exit the routine.
Local interface and ethernet are supported as communication means for input print data, out- WiFi Protected Setup (WPS) Push button configuration (PBC), Personal identification num-
put scanned data, and use utility with a PC. A public switched telephone network (PSTN) pro- ber (PIN)
vides an interface for facsimile (MFP only). See the following tables for interface port *Connection to the Linux machine is not guaranteed. Only for infrastructure connection and
specifications: when Linux terminal is connected with wired LAN connection.
Table 1 FDI (Foreign device interface) Table 4 USB2.0 Type A connector for USB memory
Item Specification
Item Specification
Connector Used for functions that access via local interface: USB
Connector Used for functions that access via 3rd party accesso-
DirectPrint and scan to USB memory (MFP front side/
ries such as IC card reader and coin kit (authentica-
tion/Auditron) SFP rear)
Protocol One 10-pin connector is provided as standard. Device Protocol Hi-speed USB 2.0
provides 5v/120mA to connected devices.
Table 5 USB2.0 Type A connector for IC card reader
Item Specification
Connector Used for functions that access via local interface: IC
card reader
Table 7 WiFi connection (wireless adapter required) NOTE: Searchable PDF is supported with the MFP only.
Protocol One SDIO connection provided as standard See Table 11 for controller fonts.
14.4 Kbps 28.8 Kbps 33.6 Kbps 1. Print a configuration report, GP 18. Note the printer’s IP address to restore after the pro-
Chart (MMR) (MMR) (JBIG)a cedure is complete.
2. Connect the crossover cable between the PWS and printer.
IIEEJ No.4 Super Fine 56 sec. or less 29 sec. or less 22 sec. or less
3. Open a Command window (CMD) on the PWS.
Fine 26 sec. or less 13 sec. or less 1 sec. or less
• If running W7, select the start button and in the search box above, type cmd
Standard 19 sec. or less 10 sec. or less 7 sec. or less
• If running W10, in the task bar search box, type cmd and press Enter.
ITU-T No.1 Super Fine 30 sec. or less 15 sec. or less 12 sec. or less
Fine 15 sec. or less 8 sec. or less 6 sec. or less NOTE: If the Windows key is enabled (the key located in the lower left corner with the
Standard 11 sec. or less 6 sec. or less 4 sec. or less Microsoft logo), hold the Windows key down, press R and release both keys to open the
FX English Sales Text Standard 7 sec. or less 4 sec. or less 2 sec. or less Run dialog box.
FX Japanese Sales Text Standard 9 sec. or less 5 sec. or less 4 sec. or less 4. Type ipconfig at the prompt, then write down the current network settings displayed.
IIEEJ No.1 Standard 75 sec. or less 38 sec. or less 20 sec. or less
NOTE: Use the IPv4 address for the Local Area Connection, not the address listed under
a. Reference value
Wireless Ethernet Connection (if enabled in your laptop).
Transmission Time
5. Perform GP 36 to manually setup the IP address.
Fax transmission times (Tp) of image data in G3 mode are shown in Table 2.
6. After verifying the IP addresses are correctly configured, ‘ping’ the printer.
Resolution conversion is not performed during transmission, and density is normal. a. In the command window (where the blinking cursor is) type the word PING. Press
the space bar once and enter the printer’s IP address and press Enter. As an exam-
Specified value condition: ECM (No data error) ple: ping 192.168.0.2.
b. If the printer responds to the PING command, it replies four times. This should not
Incoming Call Level take more than two or three seconds.
Under ideal conditions (flat line, no noise, and no other line stress), normal signal strength shall c. If the PING command times out, or responds with “host unreachable”, check the IP
be guaranteed in the range from -3 through -43 dBm. addresses that were entered. If the IP address is correct, troubleshoot the connec-
tion using the status indicator repair adjustment procedures in Section 2 of this man-
ual.
7. If the PING command replies, exit the command window (type exit at the prompt and
press enter). This test verifies the ethernet connection is good.
8. Install the printer driver and setup the printer as a local printer. Select connect to the
printer using other port type. From the dialog drop down select Standard TCP/IP port.
9. For the printer name or IP address, enter the printer’s IP address (192.168.0.2 in this
example).
10. When the driver installation finishes, Select Yes at the Print Test Print dialog box.
NOTE: If the test page does not print, the customer could have Accounting enabled (if the
device supports it) requiring that a special code is submitted with the print job before the
printer prints. Test the printer using CentreWare Internet Services
11. After the test print is completed, open a web browser on the PWS.
NOTE: If you are unable to open the printer’s web page, verify that embedded web server Manual IP setup
is enabled on the configuration page. If your web browser is set to use a proxy address for
To assign a static IP address to the printer:
the internet connection, you will not be able to bring up the printer’s web page as you will
have no connection to that proxy server while directly connected to the printer via cross- 1. At the printer control panel, press the Home button.
over ethernet cable. Refer to PWS Browser Proxy Server Setting for instructions on Inter- 2. Touch Device >Connectivity>Ethernet>IPv4.
net explorer proxy configuration 3. Touch STATIC.
4. At the restart system prompt, touch Continue.
5. Touch the IPv4 Address field.
6. Using the keypad, enter the address as x.x.x.x, where x is a number from 0–255, then
touch Enter.
7. Touch the subnet mask field.
8. Using the keypad, enter the address as x.x.x.x, where x is a number from 0–255, then
touch Enter.
9. Touch the gateway address field.
10. Using the keypad, enter the address as x.x.x.x, where x is a number from 0–255, then
touch Enter.
11. Touch Restart.
6. Collect the audit log. Select Audit Log in the logs menu.
• The audit log window appears.
a. Check Enable.
b. Click Export. Collect the audit log.
c. The collected audit log file (.txt) is saved.
Power consumption:
Procedure
Perform the steps that follow:
1. Create a PIN code using the administrator password reset tool.
a. Run the administrator password reset tool.
b. Enter the serial number of the device with no punctuation or spaces.
c. Enter the total page count from the device.
d. Press Calculate.
e. Note the 12 digit reset code.
2. Create a reset file using Windows Notepad.
a. Windows 7
• Go to: ‘Start’ >’All Programs’ >’Accessories’ >’Notepad’.
b. Windows 8 or 10
• In Search window (next to the Start button or Windows icon) type ‘Notepad’
then select ‘Notepad’ from the list.
c. Copy the line below paste into the new Notepad text area, Figure 1. @PJL SET
JOBATTR=”@RSAP=<Pin code>”
• Replace <Pin code> with the actual 12 digit PIN code that you generated from
the SA Password tool.
• Example of PIN code: @PJL SET JOBATTR=”@RSAP=123456789123”.
NOTE: The following files can be found in an attachment to Eureka Tip ETI
1393759.
Table 3 HFSI’s
Life/Yield
Name (pgs.) Part Number
Fuser Assembly 110V 200K 115R00139
Fuser Assembly 220V 200K 115R00140
Scanner Maintenance Kit (DADF) 200K 108R01490
Feed Roller Kit (tray) 100K 116R00010
Transfer Roller Kit 200K 116R00009
(Toner yield based on ISO/IEC 19752 Test Standard. Toner consumption will vary depending
on image, area coverage and media that is used. Drum cartridge yield is based on an average
3 page job length.) Life/ yield information may vary slightly. Go to Xerox.com for current infor-
mation.
ISO International Standards Organization Modem MOdulator/DEModulator. Hardware unit that converts the ‘one’ and ‘zero’
binary values from the computer to 2 frequencies for transmission over
ITP Internal Test Pattern
the public telephone network (modulation). It also converts the 2 frequen-
JBA Job Based Accounting (Network Accounting) cies received from the telephone network to the binary values for the
JIS Japanese Industrial Standards computer (demodulation).
kg kilogram Moire Image quality defect caused by interference between patterned originals
kHz kilohertz and the digital imaging process. Moire patterns are repetitive and visible
Kill All Routine to return all NVM, including protected NVM, to a virgin state. as bands, plaids or other texture.
Factory use only MSG Management Steering Group
KO Key Operator MSI Multi Sheet Inserter
KPV 100KPV = 100,000 Print Volume ms millisecond
LAN Local Area Network N Newton
LCD Liquid Crystal Display N FX acronym for a non-duplex/simplex only device
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch DC118 Jam Counter. 2. Touch DC120 Failure Counter.
The following Items are displayed on the Jam Counter screen. The following Items are displayed on the Failure Counter screen.
• Chain-Link • Chain-Link
• Count • Count
NOTE: Jams that have occurred since the previous exit from the diagnostics with Exit NOTE: Failures that have occurred since the previous exit from the Diagnostics with Exit
(Clear Log) until now will be displayed. (Clear Log) until now will be displayed.
The count is reset when exiting from Diagnostics by using Exit (Clear Log). The count is reset when exiting from Diagnostics by using Exit (Clear Log).
3. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen. 3. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
4. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1. 4. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Measure the length (in millimeters) of “A” on the printed test pattern Side 2 (Figure 3).
Procedure
NOTE: The fault will be displayed after the machine reboots.
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC131 NVM Read / Write. to display the NVM Read / Write screen.
3. Enter the chain-Link number and touch Change.
4. The Current Value and the New Value columns are displayed.
5. Enter the value that you wish to change to into the New Value column and touch OK.
6. The entered number is displayed in the Current Value column.
7. Touch Close.
8. Touch Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.
9. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1.
Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC135 HFSI Counter to display the HFSI counter screen.
3. Enter the chain-link no. or select the parts to be replaced and touch Details.
4. The Details screen displays the chain-link and the part name of the parts to be replaced,
as well as the spec life, current value, last replacement, second last replacement and third
last replacement counters.
5. To reset the current value, touch Reset. The Reset Current Value screen is displayed.
6. Following the message and tapping Yes updates the last three replacement records in the
HFSI counter as follows.
a. The second last replacement value is moved to third last replacement.
b. The last replacement value is moved to second last replacement.
c. The current value is moved to last replacement.
d. The current value is set to 0.
7. To change the spec life, touch Spec Life. This displays the Spec Life screen.
Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC140 analog monitor.
The analog monitor screen is displayed.
3. Touch Chain-Link.
4. Enter the relevant chain-link numbers shown in Table 1 and touch OK.
5. Touch Start.
6. The resulting screen displays the following items:
• The chain-link number of the component.
• Input or Output code clarification.
• Enabled or Disabled state.
• The output level value.
7. To temporarily change the output level of a component:
a. Touch Level (wrench symbol).
b. Touch the +/- buttons to enter the new value (1 to 65535).
c. Touch OK.
8. Touch Stop All to stop the component operation.
Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC301 Initialize NVM.
3. Select the area to be initialized. Refer to Table 1.
4. Touch Start.
5. Follow the UI messages to initialize the NVM.
6. Enter dC131. Ensure NVM value 790-900 is set to 1. If the NVM value had to be changed,
switch off, then switch on the machine, GP 4. Verify that the embedded web server is
working.
7. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1.
Procedure Procedure
1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1. 1. Enter Diagnostics, GP 1.
2. Touch dC363 NVM Backup Restore. 2. Touch dC500 Blank Page Threshold Value.
The NVM Backup Restore screen is displayed. The Blank Page Threshold Value screen is displayed.
3. Touch Back Up Files or Restore Files, then touch Start. 3. Follow the message and place a blank sheet of paper (A or A4) on the DADF.
4. A message appears on the screen confirming restore NVM values; touch Yes or No. 4. Touch Start.
5. Touch Close to return to the diagnostics screen. 5. The DADF does a one-sided scan, the Threshold Value Coefficient is displayed and set.
6. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1. 6. Touch Close to return to the diagnostics screen.
7. Exit Diagnostics, GP 1.
Using Windows 7:
1. Go to: Start> All Programs> Accessories> Calculator.
2. Click on the calculator View menu button.
3. Select programmer
4. Select the Hex button.
5. Enter the Hex number.
6. Select the Dec button and the result is shown.
Using Windows 10:
1. In the search window (next to the Start button or Windows icon) type Calculator. then
select Calculator from the list.
2. Click on the calculator menu button.
3. Select Programmer.
4. Select the Hex button.
5. Enter the Hex number.
6. The result is shown in the DEC field.
Description
Each modification to the system is assigned a unique tag number. This section of the service
documentation contains a listing and brief description of all change tags.
Change tags listed in this section are listed by machine module. The module to which the tag
relates is identified by the tag prefix letter.
Tag/MOD Information
Information that may be included with each tag item is as follows:
Classification Codes
The class or classification codes are described in Table 1.
Harness Routings
IOT harness Routing ....................................................................................................... 7-53
Finisher harness Routing ................................................................................................ 7-62
HCF harness Routing...................................................................................................... 7-64
Mailbox harness Routing................................................................................................. 7-66
P/J100 Figure 1 J-112 MCU PWB and MCU-HVPS-CF harness assem- P/J287 Figure 1 I-101 LVPS PWB and ESS power-MV harness assem-
bly
bly
P/J288 Figure 1 I-101 LVPS PWB and motor power-MV harness assem-
P/J101 Figure 1 B-102 ESS MFP PWB and EMMC card
bly
P/J110 Figure 1 I-112 MCU PWB and Toner dispenser/environmental
P/J289 Figure 1 I-101 LVPS PWB and main fan
harness assembly
P/J290 Figure 1 J-113 MCU PWB and 24V MCU-MV harness assembly
P/J114 Figure 4 G-152 Toner CRUM-MV harness assembly and Toner
CRUM-MV harness assembly P/J291 Figure 1 H-101 LVPS PWB and side interlock switch
P/J116 Figure 4 E-150 Toner CRUM-MV Connector assembly and Toner P/J292 Figure 1 H-101 LVPS PWB and rear interlock switch
CRUM harness assembly P/J293 Figure 1 H-101 LVPS PWB and SUB fan-MV harness assembly
P/J122 Figure 4 D-151 Dispenser/environmental motor assembly and P/J294 Figure 2 H-124 (SCC) sub fan-MV harness assembly
dispenser/environmental harness assembly P/J300 Figure 1 G-113 MCU PWB and ESS FFC MCU
P/J130 Figure 1 I-112 MCU PWB and crum-MV harness assembly P/J301 Figure 1 D-103 ESS MFP PWB and ESS power-MV harness
P/J131 Figure 4 I-152 XERO CRUM-MV harness assembly and CRUM- assembly
MV harness assembly P/J302 Figure 1 B-104 HDD assembly and ESS MFP PWB
P/J133 Figure 4 H-154 XERO CRUM-MV harness assembly and CRUN P/J310 Figure 1 B-105 HDD assembly and ESS MFP PWB
DCDL connector assembly
311*** Figure 1 C-104 Not connected *** (did not find on illustration)
P/J140 Figure 1 H-114 MCU PWB and TA clutch/humidity-MV harness
P/J322 Figure 1 A-104 Not connected
assembly
P/J335 Figure 1 B-105 ESS MFP PWB and ESS MCU FFC
P/J145 Figure 3 E-140 Humidity/temperature sensor and clutch/humidity-
MV harness assembly P/J340 Figure 1 A-104 Ethernet port
P/J146 Figure 3 I-140 Take away clutch and take away clutch/humidity- 345**** Figure 1 C-103 ESS MFP PWB and front USB harness assembly
****(DID NOT FIND ON ILLUSTRATION)
MV harness assembly
P/J346 Figure 1 A-103 USB type A port
P/J171 Figure 4 C-151 Envelope mode sensor and dispenser/environ-
mental harness assembly P/J351 Figure 1 A-105 FDI port
P/J190 Figure 1 G-114 MCU PWB and size switch harness assembly P/J353 Figure 1 D-103 ESS MFP PWB and fax harness assembly
P/J191 Figure 2 F-128 Size switch assembly and size switch harness P/J356 Figure 1 D-103 ESS MFP PWB and A4 fax speaker assembly
assembly P/J380 Figure 1 A-105 Debug port
P/J Map Coordinates Connection P/J287 Figure 1 I-101 LVPS PWB and ESS power-MV harness assembly
P/J288 Figure 1 I-101 LVPS PWB and motor power-MV harness assembly
P/J1 Figure 2 F-123 UI console assembly and UI harness assembly
P/J289 Figure 1 I-101 LVPS PWB and main fan
P/J4 Figure 2 F-123 Main speaker and AIO UI console assembly
P/J290 Figure 1 J-113 MCU PWB and 24V MCU-MV harness assembly
P/J100 Figure 1 J-113 MCU PWB and MCU-HVPS-CF harness assembly
P/J291 Figure 1 H-101 LVPS PWB and side interlock switch
P/J101 Figure 1 B-103 SFP ESS PWB and EMMC card
P/J292 Figure 1 H-101 LVPS PWB and rear interlock switch
P/J110 Figure 1 I-112 MCU PWB and dispenser/environmental harness
assembly P/J293 Figure 1 H-101 LVPS PWB and sub fan-MV harness assembly
P/J114 Figure 4 G-138 CRUM-MV harness assembly and CRUM-MV har- P/J294 Figure 2 H-124 (SCC) sub fan and SUB fan-MV harness assembly
ness assembly P/J300 Figure 1 G-113 MCU PWB and ESS MCU FFC
P/J116 Figure 4 D-136 CRUM connector assembly and CRUM-MV harness P/J301 Figure 1 D-103 ESS SFP PWB and ESS power-MV harness assem-
assembly bly
P/J122 Figure 4 C-136 Dispenser/Environmental motor assembly and dis- P/J302 Figure 1 B-104 ESS SFP PWB and HDD assembly
penser/environmental harness assembly P/J310 Figure 1 B-105 ESS SFP PWB and HDD assembly
P/J130 Figure 1 I-112 MCU PWB and CRUM-MV harness assembly P/J322 Figure 1 A-104 Not connected
P/J131 Figure 4 H-138 CRUM-MV harness assembly and XERO CRUM-MV P/J335 Figure 1 B-105 ESS MCU FFC and ESS SFP PWB
harness assembly P/J340 Figure 1 A-104 Ethernet port
P/J133 Figure 4 H-140 XERO CRUM-MV harness assembly and CRUM P/J345 Figure 1 C-103 ESS SFP PWB and front USB harness assembly
DCDL connector assembly P/J346 Figure 1 A-103 USB type A port
P/J140 Figure 1 H-114 MCU PWB and TA CLT/HUM-MV harness assembly P/J351 Figure 1 A-105 FDI port
P/J380 Figure 1 A-105 Debug port
P/J145 Figure 3 E-140 Humidity and temperature sensor and TA CLT/HUM-
P/J460 Figure 1 I-114 MCU PWB and developer-MV harness assembly
MV harness assembly
P/J461 Figure 3 G-136 Inverter clutch and developer-MV harness assembly
P/J146 Figure 3 I-141 Take away clutch and TA CLT/HUM-MV harness
assembly P/J462 Figure 3 H-136 Exit clutch and developer-MV harness assembly
P/J171 Figure 4 C-136 Envelope mode sensor and dispenser/environmental P/J466 Figure 3 I-136 Full stack-MV harness assembly and developer-MV
harness assembly harness assembly
P/J190 Figure 1 G-113 MCU PWB and size switch harness assembly P/J467 Figure 3 G-137 Full stack sensor and full stack-MV harness assembly
P/J191 Figure 2 F-128 Size switch assembly and size switch harness assem- P/J468 Figure 3 F-137 Gate solenoid and developer-MV harness assembly
bly P/J469 Figure 3 F-138 Exit sensor and full stack-MV harness assembly
P/J220 Figure 1 H-122 MCU PWB and finisher MCU-MV harness assembly P/J470 Figure 1 G-113 MCU PWB and LED harness assembly
Figure 1 SPF (1 of 4)
Figure 4 SFP (4 of 4)
Table 1 Connectors
P/J Maps Coordinates Description
P/J801 Figure 1 H-106 IOT and optional feeder-2C harness assembly
P/J802 Figure 1 J-112 Optional feeder PWBA and harness assembly OPF 2C
P/J803 Figure 1 F-112 Optional Feeder PWBA and optional feeder harness
assembly
P/J804 Figure 1 E-108 Main motor harness assembly and harness assembly
FDR motor
P/J805 Figure 1 F-111 Optional feeder PWBA and feed harness assembly
P/J806 Figure 1 E-107 Optional feeder feed clutch and feeder harness assembly
P/J807 Figure 1 E-107 Optional feeder no paper sensor and feeder harness
assembly
P/J808 Figure 1 F-112 Optional feeder PWB and turn harness assembly
P/J809 Figure 1 D-106 Optional feeder take away clutch and turn harness
assembly
P/J810 Figure 1 D-106 Optional feeder paper path sensor and turn harness
assembly
P/J811 Figure 1 H-112 Optional feeder PWB and size harness assembly
P/J812 Figure 1 I-107 Optional feeder size switch assembly and size harness
assembly
P/J813 Figure 1 J-112 Optional feeder PWB and LED harness assembly
P/J814 Figure 1 K-106 LED tray assembly and LED harness assembly
P/J815 Figure 1 I-112 Optional feeder PWB and feeder drawer harness assem-
bly
P/J816 Figure 1 H-107 Succeeding optional feeder and feeder drawer harness
assembly
Figure 1 Finisher P/J layout diagram Figure 2 Connector locations, sensors and motors (1/4)
Table 1 Connectors
P/J Maps Coordinates Description
P/J802 Figure 1 J-113 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly OPF 2C
P/J803 Figure 1 G-113 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly FDR motor
P/J804 Figure 1 E-107 Connects Main Motor assembly and harness assembly
FDR motor
P/J805 Figure 1 G-112 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly feed
P/J806 Figure 1 E-108 Connects OPT Feed Clutch and harness assembly feed
P/J807 Figure 1 E-107 Connects OPT Feeder No Paper Sensor and harness
assembly Feed
P/J808 Figure 1 G-113 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly turn
P/J809 Figure 1 E-108 Connects OPT Takeaway Clutch and harness assembly
Turn
P/J810 Figure 1 D-106 Connects OPT Paper Path Sensor and harness assembly
Turn
P/J811 Figure 1 I-113 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly T-Open/Lift
Motor
P/J812 Figure 1 C-109 Connects Tray Open Sensor and harness assembly T-
Open/Lift Motor
P/J813 Figure 1 J-112 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly OPF LED
P/J814 Figure 1 I-107 Connects Tray LED assembly and harness assembly OPF
LED
P/J815 Figure 1 G-106 Connects PWBA assembly OPF 550 and harness assem-
bly FDR Drawer 2
P/J818 Figure 1 H-112 Connects harness assembly OPF2-C and harness
assembly FDR Drawer 2
P/J820 Figure 1 H-114 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly lift motor I/L
P/J821 Figure 1 C-108 Connects harness assembly T-Open/Lift motor and main
motor assembly P1
P/J822 Figure 1 H-113 Connects PWBA OPF and harness assembly lift up sen-
sor
P/J823 Figure 1 F-107 Connects harness assembly lift up sensor and lift up sen-
sor
P/J824 Figure 1 J-113 Connects PWBA OPF and rear cover interlock switch
Refer to Table 1 for a list of the connection diagrams for the printer subsystems and the con-
nection details shown in each diagram.
Figure 3 Bypass Tray (MSI) connection diagram Figure 4 Paper Transfer connection diagram
Each output (+24VDC, +5VDC) of LVPS stops all outputs if it is shorted to ground or between
ground.
Each output (+24VDC, +5VDC) of LVPS stops all outputs if there is an overvoltage.
• 24VDC: 27VDC~36VDC
• 5VDC: 7VDC
Finisher Stapler
Figure 1 Inlet, I/L rear MV, I/L side MV, 24V MCU MV, LV MCU MV
Figure 12 UI, FFC MCU ESS, fax, ICCR USB, front USB, ESS power-MV, DADF/IIT, FCC
LPH (MFP std)
Figure 16 UI, FFC MCU ESS, front USB, ESS Power-MV, FFC LPH (SFP)
Figure 1 T-open, lift motor, rear interlock switch, FDR motor, OPF2-C
Figure 29 MCU, K module sensor Figure 31 OPF 550 PWB, OPF feeder no paper sensor
The following pages detail principles of operation and major component functions:
Figure 2 VersaLink® B600 and B610 SFP rear and left side views
Figure 1 VersaLink® B600 and B610 SFP front and right side views
Figure 4 VersaLink® B605 and B615 MFP front and right side view
Figure 5 VersaLink® B605 and B615 MFP rear and left side view
Basic Configuration
The printer has the basic configurations depending on the destination. See Figure 10.
• Print engine main unit (MSI and 250 feeder unit as the standard paper feeding)
• Consumables (CRU)
This device uses the LED Print Head (LPH) for the exposure process. The LPH consists of
numerous illuminating points that are lined in the main scanning direction. The LPH of this
device consists of 21 newly developed Self-Scanning* Light Emitting Diodes (SLEDs). With
506 illuminating points per SLED, the total number of illuminating points on 21 SLEDs amounts
to 10626, achieving a high resolution of 1200 dpi in the main scanning direction. Utilizing the
switching characteristics of the PNPN thyristor, makes the PN junction work as a light emitting
diode to provide the scanning function.
The LEDs emit lights according to the printing data (image data) output from the printer control-
ler, and the lights pass through the lenses to be converged onto the drum surface. The LED
illuminates the points on the drum surface corresponding to the pixels (micro points composing
characters or pictures) of the printing data. When the LED illuminates the drum surface, the
illuminated area becomes conductive. This allows the negative charge on the drum surface to
flow to the positive side and cancel the positive charge, lowering the potential on the drum sur-
face. This low-potential area becomes the electrostatic latent image.
The development process makes a visible image appear on the drum surface by electrically
attracting toner particles to the electrostatic latent image.
The magnet roll is covered by a thin semi-conductive sleeve all over the surface. The DB
(Developing Bias) voltage is supplied to this semiconductor sleeve from the High Voltage
Power Supply (HVPS). The DB voltage is negative DC voltage combined with AC voltage. The
DC voltage keeps the magnet roll at a constant negative voltage against the photoreceptor
layer of the drum. Therefore, at the area where the negative electric charge on the drum sur-
face does not decrease, the potential is lower than that of the magnet roll, while the potential is
higher than that of the magnet roll at the area where the negative charge on the drum surface
decreases. The AC voltage shakes the developer on the surface of the magnet roll so that the
toner easily flies to the drum. Thus, only the portions of the drum surface where the negative
charge has decreased below that of the magnet roll (electrostatic latent image) attract the toner
to form an image on the drum. Once the toner is deposited on the drum, the potential and the
toner-attracting force of the corresponding portion decreases because the increase of negative
charge lowers the potential at that portion.
The BTR is a conductive roll, in contact with the drum and supplied with high voltage form the
High Voltage Power Supply (HVPS). When the paper moves from the BTR to the drum, the
BTR applies a positive charge to the paper. The toner image on the drum is transferred from
the drum to the paper. This attraction occurs due to the negative charge induced in the conduc-
tive layer of the drum being attracted to the positive charge on the back side of the paper.
Neutralization
In the neutralization process, the charge on the paper is neutralized or eliminated by the elimi-
nator. The charge is neutralized (removed) to prevent the toner on the paper from spreading
over the surrounding metal surfaces. The eliminator is a metal sheet that is held at the ground
potential. It neutralizes the positive charge applied in the transfer process by applying a nega-
tive charge to the back side of the paper.
Cleaning (Drum)
In the cleaning process, excess toner and charge is removed from the drum, BCR and BTR
surfaces to eliminate the charge on the drum surface.
Drum Cleaning
The excess toner that was not transferred to the drum in the transfer process remains on the
drum surface. To prevent the excess toner from causing problems in the subsequent pro-
cesses, the toner is scraped off by the drum cleaning blade in contact with the drum surface,
then collected into the waste cartridge.
BCR Cleaning
The cleaning roll made of a spongy material contacts the BCR (bias charge roll) surface,
Figure 5 Waste toner collection
scrapes off the remaining toner, then transports it to the waste toner collection area.
BTR Cleaning
The excess toner deposited on the BTR in the transfer process contaminates the backside of
the subsequent sheets. To prevent this the HVPS sends negative high voltage to the BTR to
reverse-transfer the toner from the BTR to the drum. The cleaning blade, in contact with the
drum, scrapes off the reverse-transferred toner from the drum and transports it to the waste
toner collection area.
Fusing
In the fusing process, toner is fixed onto the print medium by heat and pressure. The toner par-
ticles are melted by the heat roll heated by the heater lamp, and fused onto the print medium
by the pressure between the heat roll and the pressure belt. The pressure belt, friction-driven
by the heat roll, nips the print media against the heat roll by using its pressurizing mechanism.
The sheet fed from the paper cassette is passed through the chute directly and fed to the reg-
istration section. Refer to Figure 5.
To avoid this problem, the lead edge position of the sheet needs to be corrected at the registra-
tion section before the sheet is forwarded to the toner transfer section.
By thrusting the edge of the sheet fed out of the MSI or tray against the locked roll assembly
regi, the sheet’s lead edge position is corrected. Refer to Figure 6.
The main motor drive is transferred to the exit clutch, which rotates the exit roll forward. The Inside the DADF, the sheet is fed by the DADF takeaway roll rotated by the DADF motor,
sheet is fed to the duplex assembly along the lower gate, which is shifted to the upper position aligned by the DADF registration roll rotated by the DADF motor, and fed to the scanner home
by the gate solenoid. (CVT: Constant Velocity Transport) position in the carriage assembly, and is scanned (simplex).
Then, the sheet is fed by the DADF transport roll rotated by the DADF motor to the CVT posi-
The duplex roll is driven by the PH motor which feeds the sheet to the registration position. tion, and is scanned (duplex).
After the sheet passes the heat roll and side 2 printing has completed, the sheet is output to
the lower exit. The exit roll rotates forward and the lower gate is at the upper position. Refer to After being scanned, the sheet is ejected by the DADF exit roll rotated by the DADF motor to
Figure 9. the DAD F's document output tray.
Air Flow
Fan Main
Takes air in from outside the machine, and prevents temperature rise inside the machine.
Fan Sub
Takes air in from outside the machine, and prevents temperature rise inside the machine.
• Drum
Forms the static latent image and the toner image.
• BCR
Charges the drum.
• Cleaning roll
Cleans toner on the BCR surface.
• Drum cleaning blade
Cleans the remaining toner in the drum after the toner image is transferred on the sheet.
• Magnet roll
Contacts with the drum and forms the toner image on the drum.
• Admix auger, supply auger
Stirs toner.
• Trimmer rod
Equalizes toner and carriers on the magnet roll.
• ATC sensor
Detects the toner concentration in the development unit.
BTR Roller Assembly (PL 19.2 Item 11)
The BTR roller assembly mainly consists of the following components:
• BTR (Bias transfer roll)
Contacts with the reverse side of the toner transfer face on the sheet, and transfers the
toner image formed on the drum to the sheet.
• Eliminator
neutralizes the sheet.
Connector Assembly Crum DC CL
Detects whether the correct drum cartridge is set to the Xero IOT assembly.
Fuser assembly
The fuser assembly is a unit that fuses the complete toner image transferred on the sheet with
the sheet by heat and pressure.
Duplex Clutch
Transfers the drive from the main motor to the duplex roll inside the duplex assembly.
Exit Sensor
Detects a sheet as it passes out of the fuser.
PWBA MCU
Performs communication with the printer controller and controls each component in printing.
PWBA LVPS
Generates the +24VDC and +5VDC from the AC power source to provide power for each com-
ponent.
WIRELESS MODULE
Controls the wireless network interface.
EMMC BOARD
Non-volatile memory that stores the machine information.
Interlock Function
Figure 11 shows the interlock function.
Speaker Main
Generates the operational sound for the console assembly UI AIO. The speaker is attached to
the main device.
Figure 11 Interlock function
Console assembly
The console assembly UI SFP displays the state of the printer using the LCD and LED, and
operates the printer using the buttons.
Figure 13 UI function (B615) MFP_Tall
Speaker Main
Console Assembly Generates the operational sound for the console assembly UI AIO. The speaker is attached to
The console assembly UI AIO displays the state of the printer and FAX using the LCD and the main device.
LED, and operates the printer and fax by using the buttons.
Speaker Main
Generates the operational sound for the console assembly UI AIO. The speaker is attached to
the main device
Speaker Assembly A4 Fax (PL 18.1 Item 14) Figure 16 Scanner IIT function (MFP)
Indicates that the incoming call is a fax. The speaker assembly A4 is attached to the main
device. IIT Assembly (PL 50.1 Item 2)
• Carriage motor (scanner motor)
The stepper motor that drives the carriage assembly.
• Scanner home position sensor (CVT position)
As part of the rear side of the carriage assembly frame, the sensor functions as an actua-
tor and blocks the light on the scanner home position sensor, thus detecting the registra-
tion position. This sensor detects the home position of the carriage assembly. When the
carriage assembly is in the home position, the light is shielded, and when not in the home
position, the light is unshielded.
• When a document is loaded in the DADF, the document stopper is locked to prevent the
document from being moved forward.
• When the DADF starts feeding, the front portion of the pickup assembly is lowered. This
unlocks the document stopper that blocks the document. When the document stopper is
pressed by the lead edge of the document in the feed direction, the document is fed.
When the paper feed is completed, the pickup assembly returns to its original position.
Process Control
Process Control
The parameters related to image formation must be corrected to stabilize printing. This control
involves the entire printing process including the parameter correction control. The process
control is performed by the following two methods after every 30 cumulative prints upon termi-
nation of a print run or during a continuous run:
• Potential control
• Toner density control
To supplement these two controls, the following controls are provided:
• High area coverage mode
• Admix mode
Potential Control
To stabilize the print image density, the drum charging voltage, the developing DC voltage, and
the LED light amount of the LPH are adjusted according to the ever-changing developing capa-
bility of the developer. The adjusted drum charging voltage, the developing DC voltage, and the
LED light amount of the LPH are fed back to keep the print image density constant.
The surface temperature of the Heat roll is detected by the Temp. sensor (STS = Soft Touch
sensor) in the middle of the Heat roll and the Temp. sensors (STS) at the end sections. When
the temperature detected is higher than the target value, the Heater Lamp is turned OFF. When
the temperature is below the target value, the Heater Lamp is turned ON.
The surface temperature of the heat roll is detected by the temperature sensor (NC sensor =
non-contact sensor) in the middle of the heat roll and the temperature sensor (STS) at the end
section. When the temperature detected is higher than the target value, the heater lamp is
turned OFF. When the temperature is below the target value, the heater lamp is turned ON.
However, the NC sensor and STS may detect a temperature lower than the actual value when
an error occurs during the temperature detection. To prevent, in such a case, the heater lamp
from activating for an excessive duration causing the fuser assembly to melt or burn, the heater
lamp is turned off unless warm-up is completed within the specified time.
The target temperature varies depending on the printer status such as warm-up, printing, or
process control, and is calibrated according to the interior temperature detected by the sensor
hum temp, the temperature difference between the middle and the ends of the heat roll, the
printing mode, and the input power supply voltage.
Figure 3 Drum
This section describes in detail the media path, sensors, major assemblies, and operational
characteristics for each of these options.
• 550-Sheet feeder
• Wireless adaptor
• 2000 sheet HCF
• Mailbox
• Finisher
The options are documented in their respective installation instructions. Refer to Figure 1 for
the option feeder functions.
Product Description
*Model No. or Product Name:
List damaged and affected part(s) of the machine by description and part number:
Customer Identification
*Customer Name: *Name of Customer Contact Person:
Fax:
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red, with a tan wash background
Details of Incident
*Description Of Incident: (Check all that apply)
Smoke
Describe quantity and duration of smoke:
Other, describe:
MANDATORY DESCRIPTION (above): Provide a detailed description of all valid factors that may have
contributed to the incident. Hardware involved in the incident should be preserved and retained for further
investigation should investigation be deemed necessary by EH&S.
LIST INCIDENT DESCRIPTIONS AND SUPPORT DIAGRAMS/DATA INCLUDED OR ATTACHED:
*Did external emergency response provider(s) such as a fire department, ambulance, etc. respond?
No Yes Identify: (i.e., source, names of individuals)
Apparent cause of incident (identify part that is suspected to be responsible for the incident)
* Required information is preceeded by asterisk, title shown in red with a tan wash background
JOB TITLE:
DATE:
PRODUCT AND PUBLICATION TITLE: PUBLICATION REVISION DATE: SOFTWARE REVISION LEVEL:
Part#: 705P01394